JP2020138003A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide an AT game with high novelty.SOLUTION: A slot machine includes a normal period 1, a normal period 2 as a fixed period, a normal period 3, and a battle zone in a normal state. In the slot machine, the normal period 1 is set when a privilege period is completed, the normal period 2 is set when the normal period 1 is completed, and the normal period 3 is set when the normal period 2 is completed. In the slot machine, a point acquisition rate of the normal period 1 is 0, and a point acquisition value per unit game of the normal period 2 is larger than a point acquisition value per unit game of the normal period 3, and a game result of the battle zone is controlled based on the total point value acquired at a point of time when the normal period 3 is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 83

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a slot machine (rotary body game machine) and a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine).

Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of the game consoles. In this slot machine, when a medal is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button, the symbol display window is displayed. It is configured so that a combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed according to an internal decision. Then, when a winning combination with the payout of medals is established, a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination are paid out.

Some such game consoles perform privileged games such as so-called AT games in which information regarding the operation of the stop button for deriving a stop mode advantageous to the player is notified (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2016-87308

However, since it is easy to predict the expected profit during such an AT game, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. That is, there is still room for improvement in a game table provided with a privilege game such as an AT game.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game table provided with a privileged game such as a highly novel AT game.

In order to achieve the above object, the game console according to the present invention is, as one aspect,
The operation means operated by the player and
A notification means for notifying operation information for the operation means and
A game period setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
An effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect,
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period, an AT period, and a chance period.
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period.
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the chance period to the AT period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the chance period.
When it is confirmed by the game period setting means that the AT period is set immediately after the end of the chance period (hereinafter, "first case"), the effect executing means produces a definite suggestion effect in the chance period. It ’s a viable means,
There are multiple types of chance periods,
The plurality of types of chance periods include a first chance period and a second chance period.
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means that does not execute the definite suggestion effect during the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the definite suggestion effect during the second chance period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the first chance period effect to recognize that it is the first chance period in the first chance period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table provided with a privileged game such as a highly novel AT game.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which develops and shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a figure explaining the small combination 3 shown in FIG. 5 in detail. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the RT system of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is the schematic diagram of the specified number of times lottery table used for the specified number of times lottery. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is the schematic diagram of the push order lottery table used for push order lottery. It is a figure explaining the notification mode of the operation navigation of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small winning combination 3 in the non-AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small winning combination 3 in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the re-game combination 1 in the non-AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the re-game combination 1 in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the main control unit / operation condition display setting process in step S107 of FIG. 15, and (b) shows in detail the flow of the operation navigation setting process in step S202 of FIG. 17 (a). It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The second sub-control unit main process, the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and the second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the operation navigation setting process of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention in detail (modification example). This is a production example of a small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining in detail the small role 3 of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure explaining the execution state of the effect a in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small winning combination 4 of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the operation navigation of the game which internally won the small combination 3a, the small combination 4, or the replay combination 1 in the AT state of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-gaming role 1 of the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a transition of the AT-based game state, a notification mode of expectation effect, and a re-gaming combination. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation of the game which was internally elected in 1. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the push order lottery table used when the re-game combination 1 in the AT state of the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is internally won, and (b) is a sense of expectation. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the production and operation navigation. (A) is a diagram showing the transition of the AT system game state of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the notification mode of the expectation effect, and the execution status of the operation navigation of the game internally won for the re-game combination 1. , (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the push order lottery table used when the re-game combination 1 in the AT state is internally won. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the operation navigation with respect to the small combination 3a internal winning of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the execution state of the operation navigation in the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the RT system of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, transition of the game state of AT system, and the number of games set in the expected state and AT state. It is a schematic diagram explaining the content of the AT game number lottery of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the variation of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, and the figure explaining the limiter of the privilege period. It is a figure explaining the number of games of the first AT state and the number of games of the AT state after the second time in the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the AT transition lottery of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the transition time at the time of transition from the expected state to the AT state in the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a graph which shows the relationship between the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, and the number of medals acquired. It is a figure explaining the effect of the expected state of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the story effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution pattern of the story effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the notification number table of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the AT game number notification effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the AT game number correction processing of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the AT game number correction processing when the number of AT games is determined to be 70 games in the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the setting suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the execution time of the setting suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the game state control process in step S512 of FIG. 55, and (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT system game state control process in step S602 of FIG. 56 (a). is there. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the internal lottery command processing of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the game state command processing. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the counting process of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the counting process of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the content of the ending effect of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the erasing timing of the final game notice image in the ending effect of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the AT game number correction processing of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the setting suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the count processing of the privilege period of the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine of the prior art. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production of the final prediction game of the AT state of the slot machine which concerns on another embodiment of this invention (a modification). It is a time chart explaining the addition special zone of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the premium ending effect of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart explaining the end of the AT effect state (ending) of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production mode of the premium ending effect of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the addition special zone effect of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect control process of the 1st sub-control unit of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the addition special zone of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect to execute in the addition special zone of the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal state of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the point lottery which is executed in the normal state of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal state of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal period 1 and the normal period 1 effect of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal period 2 and the normal period 2 effect of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal period 2 effect of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the normal period 3 and the normal period 3 effect of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the lottery data of the battle zone start game number lottery of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention, and the CZ transition lottery. It is a figure which compares the normal period set in the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention, and the normal period set based on other specifications. It is a figure explaining the grounds which provided the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state of the AT system of the main control part, and the effect state of the 1st sub-control part when the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention is power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game state control processing of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the point acquisition process of step S802 of FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the normal period 3 of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 of the slot machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the game table which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<< Embodiment to limit operation navigation >>
In the first to fourth embodiments described below, the operation navigation (the effect of notifying the information on the operation of the stop button for deriving the stop mode advantageous to the player) is restricted in the AT (assist time) game. It is composed of forms.

[First Embodiment]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game console that advances a series of games that end without paying out.

During a so-called AT (assist time) game, the stop operation tends to be monotonous. In particular, in an AT game, in a game in which information on forward push to stop in the order of left reel, middle reel, and right reel is notified, it is assumed that a predetermined profit is obtained by performing a stop operation according to the notified information. However, for the player, since it is the same as the stop operation that is usually performed, it may not be possible to obtain a very good feeling. On the other hand, in a game in which no information regarding the stop operation is notified in the AT game, the player may presume that he / she will not be able to obtain a profit and may feel bored.

The game console of the present embodiment is a game console that can improve the motivation to play without making the stop operation monotonous during AT games.

<Overall configuration>
FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage (also referred to as display position 1) of the left reel 110 is the upper design on the left reel, and the design displayed on the middle stage (also referred to as display position 2) of the left reel 110 is the middle design on the left reel, left. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the reel 110 (also referred to as display position 3) is the lower part of the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the upper part of the middle reel 111 (also referred to as display position 4) is the upper part of the middle reel and the middle part of the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in (also referred to as display position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel 111 (also referred to as display position 6) is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the right reel 112 upper (display position 7). The symbol displayed on the right reel (also referred to as the display position 8) is on the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is on the right reel middle symbol and the right reel 112 is on the lower row (also referred to as display position 9). The displayed symbols are referred to as the lower symbols on the right reel, and each symbol on each reel 110-112 is displayed on each reel 110-112 in the vertical direction through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols.

Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line (hereinafter, also referred to as the valid line) is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

In the present embodiment, the middle horizontal winning line composed of the display positions 2, 5 and 8, the upper horizontal winning line composed of the display positions 1, 4 and 7, and the lower horizontal winning line composed of the display positions 3, 6 and 9. Five winning lines are set: a winning line, a right-up winning line composed of display positions 3, 5, and 7, and a right-down winning line composed of display positions 1, 5, and 9.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a game table that recommends betting three medals, and when the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) reaches the specified number (three), the above five winning lines become effective. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to five. Further, in a game with a non-recommended number of bets (a game with one or two bets), a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as a valid winning line.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special role (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 for the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 for the stop operation is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The navigation generation state notification lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the main control unit 300 is in any of the navigation generation states 1 or 2 described later (hereinafter, referred to as “navigation generation state”). The player can grasp that the navigation generation state is in the navigation generation state from the lighting mode of the navigation generation state notification lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Below, three reels 110-112 are arranged. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board in which the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157, an effect device 160 and an effect control board for controlling the effect device 160 (not shown). (Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display A drive circuit 328 for driving 125, a game information display 126, a payout number display 127, and a navigation generation status notification lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9v) is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can send a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) via an input / output interface. Is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and uses the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each reel 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the figure is a view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plane developed.

On each reel 110-112, a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. .. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, a "bell symbol" is arranged on the number 1 frame of the left reel 110, a "replay symbol" is arranged on the number 0 frame of the middle reel 111, and a "watermelon symbol" is arranged on the number 0 frame of the right reel 112. ing.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 3, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 4). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state (also referred to as RT3, which will be described in detail later) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 3 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, The special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 3 are included in the prize.

Special roles 1 and 2 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "special roles") are roles (actuating roles) that shift to the special gaming state (RT3) by winning a prize. However, no medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)" or "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)", and the special role 2 is "BAR-BAR-BAR". (RB) ".

When the special combination is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (also referred to as RT2, which will be described in detail later). This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role that was internally won in the special role 1 or 2 is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, the special role) If 1 is internally won, "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)" or "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of sheets are paid out, the state shifts to the normal state (also referred to as RT1-1. Details will be described later).

Re-games 1-3 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "re-games") are prize-winning roles (operations) that allow a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. It is a role), and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Replay-Replay-Replay" for Replay 1 (also called "Normal Replay") and "Replay-Replay-Bell" for Replay 2 (also called "Promotion Replay 1"). , Replay 3 (also called "promotion replay 2") is "bell-replay-replay".

The main control unit 300 sets the game state to the navigation generation state 1 (also referred to as RT1-2. Details will be described later) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 in the normal state (RT1-1). Migrate to. Further, based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 3 in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the game state is shifted to the navigation generation state 2 (also referred to as RT1-3, details will be described later). Let me.

"Small roles 1 to 4" (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "small roles") are winning roles in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is small role 1 (also referred to as "watermelon"). "Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", small role 2 (also called "cherry") is "ANY-cherry-ANY", small role 3 (also called "Oshijun bell") is "bell-bell-bell" , Small role 4 (also called "common bell") is "bell-bell-bell". The corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry) are each awarded when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. In addition, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Also known as Oshijun. On the other hand, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) always wins a prize regardless of the content of the stop operation (operation order, operation timing) when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process. It is also called the role of pull-in 1 and the role of unquestioned push order.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is a pushing order combination, the small winning combination 4 (common bell), and the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is a push order unquestioned combination.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) have the same symbol combination and the same number of medals are given, so that “bell-bell-” is placed on the effective line. When the symbol combination of "bell" is displayed, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell). Below, if you win the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or small winning combination 4 (common bell) internally and the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combination is displayed on the valid line, you will win the "bell prize". May be said.

The small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is set so that the profitability differs depending on the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the player's stop buttons 137 to 139. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is subdivided into small winning combination 3a, small winning combination 3b, small winning combination 3c, small winning combination 3d, small winning combination 3e, and small winning combination 3f. Has been done. The internal winning probabilities of these six roles are the same.

For example, (1) when the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the stop operation is such that the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112 (hereinafter, "" (Abbreviated as "left, middle, right") is the stop operation of the correct answer, and if this stop operation of the correct answer is performed, the small winning combination 3a will be won and eight medals will be paid out, while the stop other than this correct answer will be stopped. If the operation is performed, the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) will not be won and eight medals will not be paid out. Similarly, (2) when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111 (hereinafter, , "Abbreviated as" right, left, middle ") is the correct stop operation, and (c) if the small winning combination 3c is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the first. 3 The stop operation with the stop reel as the left reel 110 (hereinafter abbreviated as "middle right left") is the correct stop operation, and (d) when the small winning combination 3d is internally won, the first stop reel is left. The stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "left and right middle") in which the reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111 is the correct stop operation, and (e) small winning combination 3e. If the internal winning is won, the correct answer is the stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "middle left and right") in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. (F) When the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. (Hereinafter, abbreviated as "right, middle, left") is the correct stop operation.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is not set so that the profitability differs depending on the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the player's stop buttons 137 to 139. , If you win the small role 4 (common bell) internally, you will always win the small role 4 (common bell) and 8 medals will be paid out regardless of the operation order of the above 6 options. ..

If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one role, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .. The set value is for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the game table to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when the game is played for a predetermined period. It is a value of, so-called "payout rate", and can be set in a plurality of stages of set values, for example, setting "1" to setting "6".

Although the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) of the present embodiment is set as a single winning combination, it may be set as a duplicate winning combination that simultaneously wins a plurality of winning combinations. For example, the small winning combination 3 and the small winning combination 5 (not shown) and the small winning combination 6 (not shown) may be set as winning combinations at the same time. In this case, when the correct answer stop operation is performed, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won, and when the incorrect answer stopping operation is performed, another small winning combination is won or lost. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won and the correct answer is stopped, the small winning combination 3 is won and eight medals are paid out, while the incorrect answer is stopped. When the operation was performed, the small role 3 was not won and the medal was not paid out. However, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) as described above is set as a duplicate winning combination, if the duplicated winning combination is internally won, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) wins when the correct answer is stopped. Eight medals may be paid out based on the above, and a predetermined number of medals less than eight may be paid out based on the other small winning combination prizes at the time of the stop operation of one incorrect answer. That is, in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation, fewer medals may be paid out than in the case of the correct answer stop operation.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later) and stopping the selected reel. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed in line on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, the case where a certain winning combination is internally won, or the case where a special combination is internally winning (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed in the same range within the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of prohibition control, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (flag is being carried over), the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed in the same range within the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 7A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a normal state (RT1-1), a navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), a navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). , And have a special gaming state (RT3). The normal state (RT1-1), the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) are also collectively referred to as a "normal game state". Further, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be collectively referred to as the "navigation generation state" as described above. The navigation in the navigation generation state means the operation navigation, and the operation navigation will be described in detail in the AT-type game state described later. In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these five are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state.

Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Normal state (RT1-1)>
In the normal state (RT1-1), the result of the internal lottery is generally lost (no internal winning of any of the special role, the re-game combination, and the small combination), or the stop display result is any combination. It is set that the stop display result of the loss that does not correspond to the symbol combination of is generally derived, and the total number of medals to be acquired is less than the total number of inserted medals. Therefore, the normal state (RT1-1) is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The normal state (RT1-1) is set in the initial state, and when the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) or the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) (details). Will be described later), or when a specified number of medals are paid out in the special gaming state (RT3) (details will be described later), the normal state (RT1-1) is set.

On the other hand, in the normal state (RT1-1), when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 (promotion replay 1) is displayed on the valid line (when the re-game combination 2 is won), the navigation generation state Shift to 1 (RT1-2). In addition, when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (when the special role is won). , Shift to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2)>
In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the AT system game state is in the AT state, the operation navigation is performed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. It is a game state to be executed.

In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1) is displayed on the valid line in the normal state (RT1-1) (replay combination 2 is won). If) is set.

Here, when the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is set, the specified number of times lottery using the specified number of times lottery table shown in FIG. 7B is executed, and either 1, 2 or 3 is specified. Set to the number of times. Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the specified number of times means the maximum number of operation navigations executed by internally winning the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell), and when the specified number of operation navigations are executed, the navigation is performed. The generation state 1 (RT1-2) ends and shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). For example, when 3 is set as the specified number of times, when the operation navigation for the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internal winning is executed 3 times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 1 (navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2)) RT1-2) ends.

In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the valid line (when the replay combination 3 is won), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ), And when the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (when the special role is won). , Shift to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3)>
Similar to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the replaying combination 1 (when the AT system gaming state is in the AT state). This is a game state in which operation navigation is executed in a game that is internally won in (normal replay).

In the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is displayed on the valid line in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) (replay combination 2). If you win a prize), it will be set. That is, when the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won before all the operation navigations of the specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) are executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set.

Here, when the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set, the specified number of times lottery using the specified number of times lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is executed, and either 30, 40 or 50 is specified. Set to the number of times. For example, when the specified number of times is 30, when the operation navigation for the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internal winning is executed 30 times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ) Ends. Since the specified number of times set in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is larger than the specified number of times set in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 is set from the viewpoint of the navigation generation state period. (RT1-3) is a state more advantageous than the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2).

When the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (when the special role is won). , Shift to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Special role internal winning state (RT2)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, this flag is set. It is a gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special role can be displayed.

The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is set when the special combination is internally won in the normal gaming state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2). On the other hand, in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning special combination is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special gaming state (RT3) is a gaming state that is profitable for the player. That is, in the special gaming state (RT3), the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of inserted medals.

The special game state (RT3) is set when the special role won internally is won in the normal game state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2), or in the special role internal winning state (RT2). .. On the other hand, in the special game state (RT3), when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when the payout of more than 300 medals is completed, the normal state (RT1-1) ). In addition, when the state shifts to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1) when the payout of more than 100 medals is completed. To do.

In the present embodiment, the special gaming state (RT3) ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed, but for example, a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is terminated when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, or a predetermined number. It may end when there is a winning number of times (for example, 8 times), or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of games are played.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 2) is won in the normal state (RT1-1), the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is entered, but the normal state (RT1-1) In, when the player is internally elected to the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 2), the system may shift to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). Similarly, when the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 3) is won in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the system shifts to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), but the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ), When the player is internally elected to the replay combination 3 (promotion replay 3), the system may shift to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the special gaming state (RT3) ends, the state uniformly shifts to the normal state (RT1-1), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) becomes a special role. In the case of shifting to the internal winning state (RT2) and the special gaming state (RT3), when the special gaming state (RT3) ends, the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be shifted.

Further, in the normal game state of the present embodiment, the change of the internal winning probability of the re-game combination is not particularly mentioned, but the internal winning probability of the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is changed to the other normal game state (RT1). It may be set higher than -1, RT1-2).

<AT game state>
FIG. 8A is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The AT-type game state is roughly classified into a non-AT state and an AT state. The AT state refers to a state in which a notification effect (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation") relating to the content of the stop operation can be executed, and the non-AT state means a state in which the operation navigation cannot be executed. That is, the AT state refers to a game state in which an operation navigation including an operation timing or an operation sequence of a stop operation is executed so as to bring an advantageous result to the player. In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the AT state, more specifically, among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell), the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won. If so, the operation navigation showing the correct operation order is executed (the reason will be described later).

In the present embodiment, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the non-AT state, a predetermined number of AT games is given and the AT state is started. The AT start condition of the present embodiment is established based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery. Further, in the AT state, when all the assigned AT games are exhausted, the AT state ends and the game shifts to the non-AT state.

Here, the number of AT games in this embodiment means the number of operation navigations for the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internal winning, that is, the specified number of times described above.

The navigation generation state is a state in which "operation navigation" can be executed from its name, but since the RT system game state and the AT system game state are not necessarily linked, even in the navigation generation state, "operation" is performed. "Navi" may not be executed. For example, in a state where the AT start condition in the normal state (RT1-1) is not satisfied, even if the player wins the replay combination 2, the state shifts to the navigation generation state (RT1-2), but the AT state is not satisfied. "Operation navigation" is not executed. Similarly, in the state where the AT start condition of the navigation generation state (RT1-2) is not satisfied, even if the player wins the replay combination 3, the navigation generation state (RT1-3) is entered, but in the AT state. Since there is no such thing, "Operation Navi" is not executed.

When the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the AT system gaming state in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is in the AT state, so that it is in the normal state (RT1- It shifts to 1) and shifts to the non-AT state. Similarly, when the operation navigation is executed a specified number of times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the AT system game state in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is in the AT state, so that the normal state ( It shifts to RT1-1) and shifts to the non-AT state.

<Operation navigation>
In the present embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, (1) operation navigation by the main control unit 300, and (2) first sub The operation navigation by the control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is executed. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as "operation navigation", both operation navigations (1) and (2) are included. The operation navigation of the present embodiment notifies the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. That is, the operation order of one of the six "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle", and "right middle left" is notified.

Explaining in detail the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. That is, the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f in the AT state are internally won. In the game in which the small role 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed when the content of the operation navigation is "left middle right" touch the number, and the player presses "left middle right" forward. This is because the player does not feel much gained because it is the same as the normal stop operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is decided not to execute the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in which the correct stop operation order is "left, middle, right" is internally won. Even if the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, in most cases, the player performs the forward push stop operation of "left middle right", and as a result, the small winning combination It is expected to win a prize of 3.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed not only in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the AT state, but also in the game in which the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. This is because the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. The correct stop operation order of the small winning combination 3a is "left, middle, right". If the operation navigation is executed only in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation indicating the forward pressing of "left middle right" is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed even in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, and the operation navigation indicating the forward push of "left middle right" is executed. The content of the operation navigation in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won is determined by the push order lottery executed by the main control unit 300.

FIG. 8B is a table schematically showing the contents of the push order lottery table used in the push order lottery. In the push order lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is set as the correct operation order. That is, the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a winning combination in any stop operation, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, one of the so-called 6 options is selected. It is decided as a correct stop operation by the push order lottery. Specifically, the winning probability of the forward push of "left middle right" is 7/12, and the other operation order is 1/12, respectively, and the operation navigation of the forward push of "left middle right" The probability of executing is high. As described above, in the game in which the small role 3 is internally won, the operation navigation of "left middle right" is not executed, so that all the games (small role 3b to 3f or the replay role 1) that execute the operation navigation in the AT state In a game in which one of them wins internally), the operation contents of the six choices are set to be notified substantially uniformly.

In this way, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell; excluding the small winning combination 3a) or the small winning combination 4 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the main control unit 300 notifies the operation navigation (stop operation order). ) Is determined, so that the main control unit 300 is a command indicating the notification content of the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell; excluding the small winning combination 3a) or the small winning combination 4 (normal replay) is internally won. (Internal winning command, push order command) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, in the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, it is possible to notify the same notification content as the operation navigation by the main control unit 300.

Here, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is specifically a 7-segment lighting effect using the payout number display device 127, and the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500. Specifically, is an audio output effect using the speakers 272 and 277, and an image display effect using the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the operation navigation by the main control unit 300. For example, when the next stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the 7-segment data displaying the letter "L" is selected, the payout number display 127 is turned on, and the next stop operation is the middle reel 111. If the stop operation is for the right reel 112, select the 7-segment data that displays the letter "C" and turn on the payout number display 127. If the next stop operation is for the right reel 112, " Select the 7-segment data that displays the letter "R" and turn on the payout number display 127.

FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. For example, when "left middle right" is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation, a character image in which the number "123" is drawn from left to right is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. .. Hereinafter, the character image of the operation navigation is referred to as the operation navigation image d10.

FIG. 9C shows a transition of the notification mode of the operation navigation when "right, middle, left" is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation. At the time t1A of the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the character "R" on the payout number display 127 and displays the operation navigation image d10 composed of the characters "321" on the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, the "right" sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As a result, the player can grasp that the right reel 112 is the first stop reel. Next, the slot machine 100 displays the character "C" on the payout number display device 127 and the character "32" on the liquid crystal display device 157 at the time t1B when the first stop operation is performed. The navigation image d10 is displayed. In addition, "medium" sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As a result, the player can grasp that the middle reel 111 is the second stop reel. Next, the slot machine 100 displays the character "C" on the payout number display 127 and the character "3" on the liquid crystal display device 157 at the time t1C when the second stop operation is performed. The navigation image d10 is displayed. In addition, the "left" sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As a result, the player can grasp that the left reel 110 is the third stop reel. Finally, the slot machine 100 ends the display of the payout number display 127 and ends the display of the operation navigation image d10 of the liquid crystal display device 157 when the third stop operation is performed.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the non-AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the non-AT state, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in the game in which the winning combination of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f is internally won. Further, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the non-AT state, the main control unit 300 internally wins any of the internal winning commands (small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f) indicating the small winning combination 3. Information that is unknown whether it was done) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. This is because the operation navigation is not executed in the non-AT state, so it is not necessary to transmit information regarding the correct operation order. As a result, even if the command is parsed illegally by a third party, the correct operation order is not grasped.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the AT state, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in the game in which (1) the small winning combination 3a is internally won, but (2) any one of the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f. Execute operation navigation in the game that was internally won for the role.

Specifically, in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state, the main control unit 300 has an internal winning command indicating the small winning combination 3 (although it can be seen that the small winning combination 3 has been internally won, the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f). Information that it is unknown which combination of the above was won internally) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this case, since the operation navigation is not executed even in the AT state, it is not necessary to transmit the information regarding the operation order of the correct answer. As a result, even if the command is analyzed illegally by a third party, the correct operation order is not grasped.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won in the AT state, the main control unit 300 performs an internal winning command (internal) indicating the internally winning small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f. Information indicating the winning combination and information indicating the operation order of the correct answer) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. This is because the operation navigation is executed in this case.

As a result, in the game in which any of the small wins 3b to 3f in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is executed. (See FIG. 9 (c)).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the non-AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the non-AT state, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. Further, in a game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won in the non-AT state, the main control unit 300 issues an internal winning command indicating the internal winning of the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) to the first sub-control unit 400. Send to.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the AT state, the slot machine 100 executes the operation navigation in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. Specifically, in the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the main control unit 300 has an internal lottery command indicating the internal winning of the re-game combination 1 and push order information indicating the correct operation order. A push order command including the above is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The push order information is information determined by the push order lottery (see FIG. 8B).

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an execution status of the operation navigation in the AT state. As a summary of the description using FIGS. 10 to 13, in the AT state, the slot machine 100 has a replay combination 1 (normal replay) or a small combination 3 (pushing order bell) of any of the small combinations 3b to 3f. ) Is internally won, the operation navigation is executed, and the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 15 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is performed.

In step S105, the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104, and the internal lottery is performed. Preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

Here, the internal lottery command when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won will be described. (1) When the AT system game state is in the non-AT state, the small winning combination 3 is internally won. (It is unknown which of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f was internally won), and (2-1) when the AT system game state is in the AT state and the small winning combination 3a is internally won. Sends information indicating that the small winning combination 3 has been internally won (it is unknown that the small winning combination 3a has been internally won), while (2-2) the AT system game state is in the AT state, and the small winning combination 3b ~ When any of the small winning combination 3f is internally won, information indicating that the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f has been internally won is transmitted.

In step S106, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S107, the main control unit / operation condition display setting process (details will be described later) for setting the operation navigation of the main control unit 300 is executed.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a pattern combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state (RT system game state, AT system game state) is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S1006 of FIG. 16) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S1001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S1002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S1003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S1004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S1005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S1006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S1007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S1008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 336, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S1009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S1011. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S1010.

In step S1010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1001 is set in each original register. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S1011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Main control unit / operation condition display setting process>
Next, the main control unit / operating condition display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the main control unit / operating condition display setting process in step S107 of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state. If the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state, the process proceeds to step S202, and if not, the main control unit / operation condition display setting process ends.

In step S202, an operation navigation setting process (detailed later) related to the operation navigation setting is executed.

<Operation navigation setting process>
Next, the operation navigation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 17B. FIG. 17B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the operation navigation setting process in step S202 of FIG. 17A.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the game. If the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, the process proceeds to step S302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3a is internally won among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell). If the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the operation navigation setting process is terminated, and if not, that is, if any of the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internally won as the content of the operation navigation. For example, when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "right, left, middle" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). After the end of step S303, the operation navigation setting process ends. Since the main control unit 300 has transmitted an internal lottery command indicating that any of the small winning combinations 3b to 3f has been internally won to the first sub control unit 400 (see step S105 in FIG. 15), the first The 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 execute operation navigation by the 1st sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received internal lottery command (FIG. 9B). (C).

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the re-game combination 1 (normal bell) is internally won in the game. If the player wins the re-game combination 1 (normal bell) internally, the process proceeds to step S305. If not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S305, the push order lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct answer, and the determined operation content of the correct answer is set as the content of the operation navigation. For details, operate one of the six options of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right middle left", and "right middle left". (See FIG. 8 (b)).

In step S306, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed according to the contents of the operation navigation determined in step S305. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). Further, in step S306, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9 (b) (c)).

<Processing of the first sub control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 18A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 18B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 18C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 18A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. For example, in the present embodiment, in the AT state, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell; excluding the small winning combination 3a) or the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, the first sub-control unit 400 / first 2 The operation navigation is set by the sub control unit 500.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S3005, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S3009, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 18B. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18C, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S3202, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3608, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 19A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 19A, various initial settings are performed. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, when the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed, the image control for displaying the operation navigation image is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19B. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 19A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S4202, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4306. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation of the forward pressing of "left middle right" is not executed, so that the forward pressing of "left middle right" is performed. There is a gameplay that reduces the amount of profit when executing the operation navigation of. However, even if there is no operation navigation in the AT state, the player usually stops the forward push of "left, middle, right", and this operation causes the small winning combination 3 (pushing order). Bell) may be won. As a result, the player can improve the motivation to play the game without making the stop operation monotonous even in the game without the operation navigation in the AT state.

<Modification example>
In the above embodiment (first embodiment), the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. However, even in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, in the game in which the re-game combination 1 in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is always executed, but the operation navigation may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, in the game in which the other winning combination in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation may be executed when a predetermined condition is met.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail a modified example of the operation navigation setting process of the present embodiment (first embodiment). In this modified example, the operation navigation can be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a, the replaying combination 1, and the loss are internally won.

In step S401, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the game. If the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, the process proceeds to step S402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S402, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3a is internally won among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell). If the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the process proceeds to step S404. If not, that is, if any of the small winning combination 3b to the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internally won as the content of the operation navigation. For example, when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "right, left, middle" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). After the end of step S403, the operation navigation setting process ends. Since the main control unit 300 has transmitted an internal lottery command indicating that any of the small winning combinations 3b to 3f has been internally won to the first sub control unit 400 (see step S105 in FIG. 15), the first The 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 execute operation navigation by the 1st sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received internal lottery command (FIG. 9B). (C).

In step S404, the operation navigation execution lottery is performed. The operation navigation execution lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the operation navigation. Specifically, the winning probability of the operation navigation execution lottery when the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) is internally won is 1/2.

In step S405, if the result of the operation navigation execution lottery in step S404 is won, the process proceeds to step S406, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S406, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) internally won as the content of the operation navigation. Specifically, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "left, middle, right" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C).

Further, in step S405, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9 (b) (c)). After the end of step S406, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won in the game. If the player wins the replay 1 (normal replay) internally, the process proceeds to step S408, and if not, the process proceeds to step S412.

In step S408, an operation navigation execution lottery is performed. The operation navigation execution lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the operation navigation. Specifically, the winning probability of the operation navigation execution lottery when the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won is 1/4.

In step S409, if the result of the operation navigation execution lottery in step S408 is won, the process proceeds to step S410, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S410, the push order lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct answer, and the determined operation content of the correct answer is set as the content of the operation navigation. For details, operate one of the six options of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right middle left", and "right middle left". (See FIG. 8 (b)).

In step S411, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed according to the content of the operation navigation determined in step S410. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). Further, in step S411, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9 (b) (c)). After the end of step S411, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S412, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning combination internal lottery in the game is a loss. If the result of the winning combination internal lottery is lost in the game, the process proceeds to step S413, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S413, the operation navigation execution lottery is performed. The operation navigation execution lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the operation navigation. Specifically, the winning probability of the operation navigation execution lottery when the result of the winning combination internal lottery is lost is 1/8.

In step S414, if the result of the operation navigation execution lottery in step S413 is won, the process proceeds to step S415, and if not, the operation navigation setting process ends.

In step S415, the push order lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct answer, and the determined operation content of the correct answer is set as the content of the operation navigation. For details, operate one of the six options of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right middle left", and "right middle left". The contents of.

In step S416, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed according to the content of the operation navigation determined in step S415. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C). Further, in step S416, preparations are made for transmitting a push order command including the operation content (push order information) of the operation navigation to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the contents of the received push order commands (FIG. 9).

In this way, in the game in which the small role 3a is internally won, the operation navigation of the forward push of "left, middle, right" may be executed, and the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. In some cases, the operation navigation may not be executed, and even if the operation navigation is lost, the operation navigation may be executed. As a result, the player does not know the winning result until the stop operation is completed in the game with the operation navigation in the AT state and the game without the operation navigation, and the player can improve the motivation to play without making the stop operation monotonous. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. However, in the game, an effect suggesting that the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has been internally won (hereinafter referred to as a small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect) may be executed.

FIG. 21A shows an example of an effect when the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. In the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21 (a), an image suggesting small winning combination 3 winning (hereinafter referred to as a small winning combination 3 winning suggestion image; for example, a bell displayed on the periphery of the screen) when the start lever is operated. (Yellow image frame suggesting winning, etc.) d20 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By visually recognizing the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion image d20, the player knows that the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has been won, so that the normal stop operation of "left middle right" is performed. Expected to do. FIG. 21A shows a display mode and an effect mode of the reel after the third stop operation when the player pushes the “left, middle, right” forward. In this case, the small winning combination 3 winning image d30 indicating the small winning combination 3 winning is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 21B shows another production example when the small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. The small winning combination 3 winning suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21B is an effect of vibrating the shutters 163a and 163b to the left and right when the start lever is operated. In this way, the small role 3 winning suggestion effect does not have to be an image effect. The player recognizes that the shutters 163a and 163b are vibrating to alert the player, and knows that the operation should be performed carefully (that is, it is better not to perform any operation other than the forward push). It is expected that the normal stop operation of "left, middle, right" will be performed. This is because if the conventional game console does not perform the normal stop operation of "left, middle, right", the reel pull-in control is executed according to the order, resulting in an unintended dropout. Because there was. FIG. 21B shows a reel display mode and an effect mode after the third stop operation when the player pushes the “left, middle, right” forward, and the small winning combination 3 winning image d30 is produced. It is displayed on the image display device 157.

In addition, the small role 3 (pushing order bell) of the above embodiment is one of the six choices of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle", and "right middle left". Was decided as the correct operation order. However, one of the subdivided small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) may set the correct answer only for the first stop operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is subdivided into five small winning combination 3ax, small winning combination 3bx, small winning combination 3cx, small winning combination 3dx, and small winning combination 3ex, and the correct answer of the small winning combination 3ax. There may be two stop operations, "left middle right" and "left and right middle". That is, when the small winning combination 3ax is internally won, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) may be won by performing the first stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110. In this case, the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3ax in the AT state is internally won, and the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3bx to the small winning combination 3ex in the AT state is internally won. .. In the game in which the small winning combination 3ax in the AT state is internally won, the player has a high probability of performing the first stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 even if there is no operation navigation. There is a high probability of winning a prize. The internal winning probabilities of these five roles are the same.

In FIG. 23 (a), in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed, but the effect a that gives the player a sense of expectation is executed. It is a time chart of a modification example when there is a case. Here, the small role 2 (cherry) is a role that may be given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game or a simultaneous internal winning with a special role (bonus) when the role is internally won. .. That is, the production a is a production in which an additional AT game and an internal winning of a special role (bonus) can be expected. It should be noted that the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) is a winning combination that is unlikely to be given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game or a simultaneous internal winning with a special winning combination (bonus).

FIG. 23B shows an example of the display mode of the effect a. In the effect a, for example, an image showing a feeling of expectation (hereinafter referred to as an expectation image; for example, characters such as “extreme heat”) d40 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By seeing the expectation image d40 of the effect a, the player expects the AT game to be added and improves the expectation.

However, conventionally, in a game in which such an expectation image d40 is displayed, if the small role 2 cannot be won, the player is disappointed and the interest of the game is lowered.

Therefore, in this modification, the effect a is executed even in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, and the expected feeling image d40 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. As a result, even if the player who visually recognizes the effect a does not win the small winning combination 2 without stopping the cherry symbol on the effective line when the middle reel 111 is stopped for the first time, the bell is on the effective line. If the symbol is stopped, it can be expected that there is a possibility of winning the small winning combination 3a as a result of the subsequent stop, so that the expectation can be maintained without being discouraged.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 23A, the effect a may be executed even when the winning combination internal lottery process in the AT state is lost. In this way, even in the case of loss, the effect a may or may not be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, the effect a may not be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won. As described above, in this modification, the execution lottery is performed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, and the effect a is executed only when the winning combination is won. ing. However, apart from this, the effect a may always be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 (cherry) or the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won.

Further, in this modification, the small winning combination 3a is set as a combination that is not given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game, but is set as a combination that may be given a predetermined profit such as an addition of an AT game. May be good. By winning a small role 3a (Oshijun Bell), the player's expectation may be further improved. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small winning combination 2 (the probability of granting the predetermined profit is smaller than that of the cherry, or the magnitude of the profit is smaller.

Although the effect a is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 in the AT state is internally won and the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the same effect a may not be executed. Any kind of production of the same series may be used. For example, the effect a1 in which characters such as "super heat" are displayed but the background color is blue to indicate that the expectation is low, and the characters such as "super heat" are displayed but the background color is highly expected. An effect a2 to be represented in red is prepared, and the effect a2 is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 2 in the AT state is internally won, and the effect a1 is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. Since there is no additional AT game (or the probability that there is an additional AT game is low) in the game in which the small role 3a is internally won, the production a1 may perform a production indicating that the expectation is lower than that of the production a2. preferable. As described above, the effect a may have the same characters in some parts or different characters in other parts.

[Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, not only the game in which the small winning combination 3 in the AT state (pushing order bell; except for the small winning combination 3a) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, but also the small winning combination 4 in the unquestioned push order. The operation navigation is also executed in the game in which the (common bell) is internally won. Then, in the operation navigation in the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) or the small role 4 (common bell) of the unquestioned push order is internally won, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is not executed, and the first sub control unit is used. Only the operation navigation by the 400 / second sub-control unit 500 is executed. This is from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load of the main control unit 300. Since the winning combination is always won regardless of the order of the stop operations, the operation navigation is less important than the pushing order combination. Therefore, it was decided to reduce the processing load of the main control unit 300 by using only the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

In addition, in the game in which the push order unquestioned combination in the AT state is internally won, when the configuration in which the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is not executed is adopted, the operation is performed if there is only one push order unquestioned combination that is the target of the operation navigation. Since the player can grasp the internal winning combination from the notification mode of the navigation, in the second embodiment, the operation navigation is executed even in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won.

For example, if the winning probabilities of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) differ between settings 1 and 6, and if the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the AT state, the operation navigation is executed unless the operation navigation is executed. It turns out that the internal winning combination was small role 4 (common bell) when the bell was won. The set value can be estimated by counting the frequency. Further, for example, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won and the lottery is performed by adding the number of games in the AT state, the operation navigation must be executed when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the AT state. When the operation navigation is not executed and the bell is won, it turns out that the internal winning combination was the small combination 4 (common bell). It is expected that the number of games in the AT state will be added each time, but if there is no actual addition, the motivation to play will be reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, even if the operation navigation is executed only by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, the internal winning combination is not exposed to the player.

In the second embodiment, only the configurations, functions, and processes different from those in the first embodiment will be described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the non-AT state and the AT state is internally won.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the non-AT state is internally won, the slot machine 100 does not execute the operation navigation and is internally won in the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state. In the game, the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is executed without executing the operation navigation by the main control unit 300.

In the game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) or small combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the notification content of the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is the first. 1 Determined by the sub-control unit 400. That is, when the main control unit 300 transmits an internal winning command indicating the internal winning of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) or the small combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state, the first sub control unit 400 replays. The push order lottery is executed upon receiving the internal winning command indicating the internal winning of the game combination 1 (normal replay) or the small combination 4 (common bell), and the notification content of the operation navigation is determined.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is always executed. However, apart from this, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, an execution lottery is performed, and only when the winning is won, the operation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is performed. You may try to execute the navigation.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an execution status of the operation navigation in the AT state of the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 26A is a diagram showing a notification mode of the operation navigation of the game in which the small winning combination 3a, the small winning combination 4, or the replaying combination 1 is internally won in the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 25, the slot machine 100 provides operation navigation by the main control unit 300 in (1) a game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) or small combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. In the game in which the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed without being executed, and (2) the small winning combination 3 of any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f in the AT state is internally won, the main Operation navigation is executed by the control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, and (3) the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won. -Neither of the second sub-control units 500 executes the operation navigation.

In the second embodiment as well, as in the modified example of the first embodiment, an execution lottery may be performed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won, and if the game is won, the operation navigation may be executed. (See steps S402 to S406 in FIG. 20).

FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing a change in the notification mode of the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, and FIG. 26 (c) is a diagram showing the change in the notification mode of the operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is in the AT state. It is a figure which shows the change of the notification mode of the operation navigation in the game which was internally elected to (normal replay).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (c), the notification mode of the operation navigation for the unquestioned push order combination is the same. This is to prevent the player from grasping the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Specifically, in the game in which the small role 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation image d10 displayed on the effect image display device 157 is an image in black characters instead of yellow that recognizes the bell. Is. Further, in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation image d10 displayed on the effect image display device 157 is an image in black characters instead of light blue for recognizing the replay. .. In this way, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the display mode of the operation navigation image d10 is the same so that the internal winning combination is not grasped.

[Third Embodiment]
The symbol combination of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) of the third embodiment is different from the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 (normal replay) of the first embodiment. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a symbol combination of the special combination 1, the special combination 2, and the replay combination 1 of the third embodiment. The only symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)", and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 1 (normal replay) is "Seven 2-Seven". 2-Seven 2 "and" Replay-Replay-Replay ". The other types of winning combinations and symbol combinations are the same as those in the first embodiment. In the third embodiment, only the configurations, functions and processes different from those of the first embodiment will be described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The replay combination 1 (normal replay) of the present embodiment is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, and (1) when the reverse push stop operation of "right, middle, left" is performed, it is on the effective line. When the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" is displayed in, and (2) a stop operation other than the reverse press of "Right, Middle, Left" is performed, "Replay-Replay-Replay" is displayed on the valid line. The symbol combination of is displayed. The replay combination 1 of (1) is referred to as a replay combination 1 of the bonus symbol, and the replay combination 1 of (2) is referred to as a replay combination 1 of the replay symbol.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27B, when the AT start condition is satisfied, only the first sub control unit 400 is in the AT state first, and the main control unit 300 has the AT start condition. It will be in the AT state from the next game of the game that was internally won in the replay role 1 (normal replay) after it is established. FIG. 27B is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the AT system of the third embodiment, the notification mode of the expectation effect, and the execution status of the operation navigation.

In the third embodiment, in the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) after the AT start condition is satisfied is internally won, the expectation effect including the content of the stop operation is executed. The expectation effect is an effect that expects a predetermined privilege to be given, and in the present embodiment, it is an effect that expects a transition to the AT state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the expectation effect is the operation navigation image d10 and the Seven 2 symbol showing the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation, as in the operation navigation. This is an effect of displaying the image d50 instructing to aim and outputting the sound indicating the operation order via the speakers 272 and 277 to encourage the winning of the re-game combination 1 of the bonus symbol. That is, the expectation effect is an effect including the notification content of the operation navigation. The content of the notification of the expectation effect of the present embodiment is information indicating the stop operation order of the reverse pressing of "right, middle, left". The player expects the transition to the AT state by viewing the effect images d10 and d50 of the expectation effect and listening to the sound of the expectation effect.

In addition, in the game in which the expectation effect is executed, even if the bonus symbol replay role 1 is won or not, the bonus symbol replay role 1 is not won (the replay symbol replay role 1 is won). However, from the next game of the game in which the expectation effect is executed, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 becomes the AT state. Assuming such playability, the re-game combination 1 of the AT state ( In a game that is internally won in (normal replay), if you execute the operation navigation of the reverse push operation order of "right, middle, left", the bonus symbol replay role 1 will be displayed, so the player misunderstands. It may improve expectations. Therefore, in the third embodiment, in the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation of the reverse push operation order of "right, middle, left" is not executed.

FIG. 28A is a table schematically showing the contents of the push order lottery table used in the push order lottery of the game internally won in the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay). As shown in FIG. 28 (a), in the push order lottery of the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the reverse push of "right, middle, left" is not selected. Then, in order to avoid the reverse push of "right middle left", the probability that the forward push of "left middle right" is selected is set high. Therefore, if the game is limited to the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the execution probability of the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" is high.

In the third embodiment, in view of this point, it is decided not to execute the "left, middle, right" forward push operation navigation in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won. This is to reduce the frequency of execution of the "left, middle, right" forward push operation navigation for the entire AT state.

In the third embodiment, the operation navigation is executed even in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the AT state is internally won. That is, in the AT state of the third embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell: excluding the small winning combination 3a), the small winning combination 4 (common bell), or the replay winning combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. The operation navigation by the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is executed. Then, the touch-the-numbers operation navigation of "left, middle, and right" can be executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) or the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won.

FIG. 28B is a time chart showing the expectation effect and the execution status of the operation navigation in the AT state. In summary, the slot machine 100 executes the expectation effect in the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won after the AT start condition is satisfied. Also, in the AT state, the operation navigation is used in the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) or the small role 3 (pushing order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) of any of the small roles 3b to 3f is internally won. In the game that is executed and the small role 3a is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed.

Therefore, the touch-the-numbers operation navigation of "left, middle, and right" is not executed in the game in which the small role 3a is internally won, and is executed in the game in which the replay role 1 (normal replay) is internally won. Does not give a small impression. In the past, there was a player who remembered the contents of the operation navigation that is frequently executed in the AT state and operated the contents in the normal game state, but it must give the impression that the operation navigation of the forward push is not executed frequently. For example, there are cases where an effect of prompting the forward push operation in the normal game state can be expected as a result.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment is similar to the third embodiment. The operating conditions for winning the re-gaming combination 1 of the bonus symbol are different, and the game performance other than that is substantially the same as that of the third embodiment. That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) include "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" and "Replay-Replay-Replay" as in the third embodiment. The re-game combination 1 is internally elected to the winning combination in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, and (1) when the forward push stop operation of "left middle right" is performed, "Seven 2-Seven 2-" is placed on the valid line. The symbol combination of "Seven 2" is displayed, and (2) when a stop operation other than the forward pressing of "left, middle, right" is performed, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the effective line.

FIG. 29A is a time chart showing the transition of the game state of the AT system of the fourth embodiment, the notification mode of the expectation effect, and the execution / non-execution of the operation navigation. The slot machine 100 executes an expectation effect in a game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won after the AT start condition is satisfied. The expectation effect is an effect that expects a predetermined privilege to be given, and also in the present embodiment, it is an effect that expects a transition to the AT state. Specifically, the expectation effect is displayed via the operation navigation image d10 showing the stop operation order of the forward pressing of "left middle right", the image d50 instructing to aim at the Seven 2 symbol, and through the speakers 272 and 277. This is a production that outputs a voice indicating the operation order of "left, middle, right" to encourage the winning of the replaying role 1 of the bonus symbol.

On the premise of such playability, in the game in which the AT state replay role 1 (normal replay) is internally won, when the operation navigation of the reverse push operation order of "left middle right" is executed, the bonus symbol is displayed. Since the re-game combination 1 is displayed, the player may misunderstand and improve the expectation. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, in the game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, the operation navigation of the forward pressing operation order of "left, middle, right" is not executed.

FIG. 29B is a table schematically showing the contents of the push order lottery table used in the push order lottery of the game internally won in the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay). As shown in FIG. 29 (b), in the push order lottery of the game in which the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) in the AT state is internally won, the forward push of "left middle right" is not selected. Then, in order to avoid the forward push of "left middle right", the probability that the reverse push of "right middle left" is selected is set high.

In the fourth embodiment, in view of the fact that the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" is not executed in the game in which the AT state replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won, the AT state small combination 3 In the game that was internally won in (Pushing order bell), it was decided not to execute the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right". If, in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won, the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" is executed, the game is internally won in the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell). This is because the player will understand that.

Although not shown, in the AT state of the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the replaying combination 1 (normal replay) or the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) of any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f. , The operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, and the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a is internally won.

Therefore, if the operation navigation other than the forward push of "left, middle, right" is executed, there is a possibility of winning a small role 3a or a replay role 1 (normal replay), and either result until the game operation is completed. You can expect to be.

[Modifications in the first to fourth embodiments]
In the first to third embodiments described above, during the entire period of the AT state, the forward push operation navigation of "left, middle, right" was not executed when the small winning combination 3a was internally won. However, during a part of the AT state, the operation navigation of "left, middle, right" when the small winning combination 3a is internally won may be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 30A, from the start of the AT state to the predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a is executed, and the predetermined number of games is executed. After (for example, 500 games), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a may not be executed. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 30B, until the difference number in the AT state is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets, etc.), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a is executed, and the game in the AT state is executed. When the number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 500 games), the operation navigation at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a may not be executed. Here, the difference number is a total count obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out.

For a player who has experienced the AT state for a long time and has become accustomed to the operation navigation, the operation navigation may not be executed or the frequency of the operation navigation may be reduced. It may be possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player.

In addition, in principle, the forward push operation navigation of "left middle right" at the time of winning the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is not executed, and in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the small winning combination 3 is continuously specified. If the number of times is not won, the operation navigation of "left, middle, right" may be executed in the next game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a situation of operation navigation in such a modified example. FIG. 31 shows that in the games G1, G2, and G3 that were internally won in the small role 3a in the AT state, the operation navigation was not executed and the small role 3 (pushing order bell) was not won (spilled eyes). Is displayed). Further, FIG. 31 shows that, as a result, in the game G4 in which the small winning combination 3a in the next AT state was internally won, the operation navigation was executed and the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) was won. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 31, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won three times in a row, the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won. It shows the case to do. The number of non-winning of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not limited to three, and may be a cumulative number as well as a continuous number.

In this way, based on the winning result of the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, it may be determined whether or not the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won next time.

In addition, the game state of the main control unit 300 may be changed according to the combination of spilled symbols displayed when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won. For example, (1) If any of the small wins 3b to 3f is internally won and the small win 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye A may be displayed, and (2) If the small winning combination 3a is internally won and the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye B may be displayed.

Here, the spilled eye A is a symbol combination accompanied by a transition to a gaming state, and is a symbol combination accompanied by a transition to a disadvantageous gaming state. On the other hand, the spilled eye B is a symbol combination that does not involve a transition of the gaming state. That is, if the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the small winning combination 3 is not won, it is difficult to shift to a disadvantageous gaming state, but in the AT state, the small winning combination 3b to 3f is internally won and the small winning combination is won. If the player does not win the prize in 3, the transition to the disadvantageous gaming state may be facilitated.

FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the state of operation navigation in such a modified example. In the game in which the small role 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed, so even if the small role 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye B is likely to be displayed (spilled eye). A is hard to display). On the other hand, therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination 3b to 3f in the AT state is internally won and the operation navigation is executed, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won, the spilled eye A is It is easier to display. Therefore, a game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won and the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is not won is internally won in any of the small winning combination 3b to 3f in the AT state, and the small winning combination 3 Compared to the game that did not win the (Oshijun Bell), it is difficult to shift to a disadvantageous game state.

In the first to third embodiments, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has a combination in which one of the so-called six choices is the correct operation order. For example, among the so-called three choices. One of the operation orders may serve as the correct operation order. Here, the three options mean, for example, a stop operation in which the first stop operation is on the left, the first stop operation is in the middle, and the first stop operation is on the right. In this case, the correct answer operation of the small winning combination 3a is set to the stop operation in which the "first stop operation is left", and in the game in which the small winning combination 3a in the AT state is internally won, the operation in which the "first stop operation is left" is set. Do not run navigation. In the past, there were many game consoles that used the recommended operation sequence of "forward push" for "left middle right" and "pinch hit" for "left and right middle", so in the AT state, "forward push" (left middle). It is possible to prevent the loss from occurring when the stop operation of (right) or "pinching" (middle left and right) is performed.

In addition, when the recommended operation order is "forward push" of "left middle right" and "pinch hitting" of "left and right middle", small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is so-called 5 choices (small winning combination 3a to small). The combination 3e), the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small role 3a is "left middle right" and "left and right middle", the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small role 3b is "middle left and right", and the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small role 3c is stopped. The operation order is "middle right left", the stop operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3d is "right left and right", and the stopping operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3e is "right middle left". When the small winning combination 3a is internally won, it is difficult to cause a loss and the number of selections can be increased.

Furthermore, in the case of a game console in which the recommended operation order is "reverse push" of "right middle left", in the AT state, "reverse push" (right middle left) is the correct stop operation. If you win internally, you may not execute the operation navigation.

Further, in the past, when the first stop reel was set to the left reel 110 and the vicinity of the black BAR was operated, there were many game tables where the loss was minimized. Therefore, in the AT state, the first stop reel was set to the left reel 110 and the vicinity of the black BAR. If a winning combination that can be avoided by operating is internally won, the operation navigation may not be executed.

In addition, a plurality of types of re-games are provided, and at least one of the plurality of types of re-games can stop the "forward push" of "left middle right" in a specific game state. A game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state when the symbol combination that maintains a specific game state is stopped when the game is performed and a stop operation different from the "forward push" of "left, middle, right" is performed. It may be a transition re-game combination in which the symbol combination that shifts to is stopped. Then, in the AT state and the specific game state, the operation navigation may not be executed when the transition re-game combination is internally elected.

<< Embodiment of playability provided with a challenge zone >>
The fifth to sixth embodiments described below shift to the AT game instead of the embodiment that limits the operation navigation in the AT (assist time) game described in the first to fourth embodiments. It is an embodiment that realizes a new playability by providing a state (challenge zone) that is easy to play.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, the configurations, functions and processes different from those in the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Types of winning roles>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination according to the fifth embodiment (this embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 33, the winning combination of the present embodiment does not have the replaying combination 2 (promotion replay) and the replaying combination 3 (demotion replay) (see FIG. 5), but the other winning combination is the first. It is the same as the embodiment. Further, the symbol combination and the number of grants of the roles shown in FIG. 33 (specifically, special role 1, special role 2, replaying role 1, small role 1, small role 2, small role 3, small role 4). And the contents of the combination are as described in the first embodiment.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is not a game table dedicated to betting three medals, but a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of medals inserted (number of bets) is set as an effective winning line. Specifically, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line will be added to the three medals. If 3 cards are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as winning lines.

<Type of game state>
FIG. 34 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a normal gaming state (RT1), a special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and a special gaming state (RT3). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these three are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, the normal gaming state (RT1) is further subdivided into a normal state, an expected state (also referred to as a challenge zone, which may be abbreviated as CZ below), and an AT state. This subdivided gaming state of the normal gaming state (RT1) is called an AT-based gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls the state related to the so-called AT (assist time), and the first sub-control is performed according to the RT system game state and the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The unit 400 is designed to set the effect game state.

Hereinafter, the transition of the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. The definitions of the normal gaming state (RT1), the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and the special gaming state (RT3) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The normal gaming state (RT1) is set in the initial state, and when the number of medals is paid out in excess of the specified number in the special gaming state (RT3) (details will be described later), the normal gaming state (RT1) is set. .. The normal gaming state (RT1) set in the initial state and the normal gaming state (RT1) set when transitioning from the special gaming state (RT3) are normal states. In addition, in the normal game state (RT1), when the special role is internally won, the game shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT2), and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the valid line (special). If you win a role), you will be in a special game state (RT3).

The special role internal winning state (RT2) is set when the special role is internally won in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning special combination is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state (RT3).

The special gaming state (RT3) is set when the special winning combination is won in the normal gaming state (RT1) or the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2). On the other hand, in the special game state (RT3), when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the state shifts to the normal state of the normal game state (RT1). Specifically, when the system shifts to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, it shifts to the normal state when the payout of more than 300 medals is completed. Further, when the state shifts to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state shifts to the normal state when the payout of more than 100 medals is completed.

Next, the game state of the AT system of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

The normal state and the expected state are game states in which the operation navigation is not executed. The normal state and the expected state are states in which the number of medals paid out <the number of medals inserted throughout the period, and the number of medals of the player is reduced. On the other hand, the AT state is a game state in which the operation navigation is executed. The AT state is a state in which the number of medals paid out> the number of medals inserted throughout the period, and the number of medals of the player increases. In the AT-type gaming state, the AT state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Further, the normal state and the expected state are gaming states that can be shifted to the AT state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The expected state is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state. That is, the expected state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

As described above, there is a difference between the normal state and the expected state in that the expected state is more likely to shift to the AT state than the normal state. Further, there is a difference between the normal state and the expected state in that the effect of expecting the expected state to shift from the normal state to the AT state is easily executed. That is, in the expected state, the effect of expecting the transition to the AT state is executed frequently (every game is executed), but in the normal state, the effect of expecting the transition to the AT state is executed frequently. Low.

The expected state may be a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed. At this time, it is preferable to set the game state in which the operation navigation is executed at a lower frequency than the AT state (the operation navigation is executed in some of the games internally won in the push order bell).

Here, the operation navigation of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the game state of the AT system is the AT state, and the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, more specifically, the small winning combination 3a When any of the small winning combination 3f is internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is executed.

FIG. 35A is a diagram illustrating a privilege period of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the game is characterized in that the AT state and the expected state are alternately continuous, and the period composed of the AT state and the expected state is referred to as a privilege period. The started privilege period ends when the limiter is reached, and shifts from the AT-type gaming state (for example, AT state or expected state) at the time when the limiter is reached to the normal state. Reaching the limiter in this embodiment is basically the digestion of 1000 games during the privilege period. That is, if 1000 games are consumed in the privilege period, the privilege period ends.

In addition, other conditions may be set as the conditions for reaching the limiter, and other conditions are set (multiple types of conditions are set) in addition to the conditions for digesting 1000 games, and any of the conditions is satisfied. The case may be a condition for reaching the limiter.

In this embodiment, the navigation generation status notification lamp 190 can be turned on during this privilege period. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the AT game number correction process is executed for the last AT state, the privilege period ends even if the number of games in the privilege period does not reach 1000 games. There is.

FIG. 35 (b) is a table showing the transition of the game state of the AT system of the present embodiment.

First, the transition from the normal state to another state will be described. In the normal state, if the transition lottery 1 for determining whether or not to shift to the expected state, which is executed every game, is won, the state shifts to the expected state. Further, in the normal state, when the transition lottery 2 for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state, which is executed every game, is won, the state shifts to the AT state. Here, the winning probability of the transition lottery 1 is set higher than the winning probability of the transition lottery 2. For example, the winning probability of the transition lottery 1 is 1/100, and the winning probability of the transition lottery 2 is 1/500. Therefore, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the expected state than to shift to the AT state.

Next, the transition from the expected state to another state will be described. In the expected state, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game shifts to the normal state. Here, the predetermined number of games means the number of games set when the transition lottery 1 is won. Specifically, when the transition lottery 1 is won, the expected number of games lottery is performed, and as shown in FIG. 35 (c), one of 10, 20 or 30 is set as the number of games. For example, when the transition lottery 1 is won and 10 is set by the expected number of games lottery, when 10 games are exhausted in the expected state, the expected state is terminated and the normal state is entered. In addition, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached in the expected state, the expected state is terminated and the normal state is entered.

When the limiter is reached in the expected state, the player's expectation may be lowered. Therefore, when the number of games remaining until the limiter is reached is small, the normal state may be set without setting the expected state. For example, when setting the expected state, the number of games until the limiter is reached is determined, and if the number of games is less than 30 games, the normal state may be set without setting the expected state.

If the AT transition lottery is won in the expected state, the AT transition state is entered. As will be described in detail later, the AT transition lottery includes the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game in the expected state and the AT transition lottery 2 executed in each game in the expected state (excluding the first game). And there is. In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the expected state, when the AT transition lottery is won, the expected state is interrupted and the game immediately shifts to the AT state, and the predetermined number of games in the expected state is exhausted. There are cases where the state shifts to the AT state later.

Next, the transition from the AT state to another state will be described. When the limiter of the privilege period is reached in the AT state, the AT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, in the AT state, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game shifts to the expected state. Here, the predetermined number of games means the number of games set when the transition lottery 2 or the AT transition lottery is won. Specifically, when the transition lottery 2 or the AT transition lottery is won, the AT game number lottery is performed, and as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the number of games is 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55 or 70. One of them is set. In the present embodiment, in the AT game number lottery for the first AT state of the privilege period, 10 is set as the number of games, and 33 and 77 are the numbers of games suggesting the set value. .. For example, when there are settings "1" to "6" as setting values, 33 and 77 are easily selected when settings "4" to "6" are set. Hereinafter, as the number of games in the AT state, 10, 20, 30, 50 and 70 are referred to as normal numbers, and 33 and 55 are referred to as set suggestion numbers.

In the present embodiment, the condition for shifting from the expected state to the normal state is the number of digested games in the expected state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of losses, the number of times the re-game combination 1 is won, and the like may be used, and in the expected game number lottery, a plurality of options may be provided for the number of losses, the number of times the re-game combination 1 is won, and the like. Even in this case, a plurality of types of expected states having different periods can be provided. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting from the AT state to the expected state is the number of digested games in the AT state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of operation navigations and the number of medals won for the small role 3 (pushing bell), which is the push order role, are used. A plurality of options may be provided. Even in this case, a plurality of AT states having different profitability can be provided.

Further, the transition conditions in the AT system gaming state shown in FIG. 35 (b) may be the same conditions regardless of the set values (settings 1 to 6), or may be different for each set value.

FIG. 36A is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the AT game number lottery in detail. In the AT game number lottery, first, one game number is selected from 10, 20, 30, 50, or 70, and then, when the selected number of games is 50 or 70, a lottery is further executed. For example, when the number of selected games is 30, the 33-selection lottery is executed, and when the 33-selection lottery is won, 33 is set as the number of games. On the other hand, when the number of selected games is 50, the 55 selection lottery is executed, and when the 55 selection lottery is won, 55 is set as the number of games.

In this first lottery, when the number of selected games is 10, 20 or 30, or when the number of selected games is 50 or 70, the second lottery (33 selection lottery, 55 selection lottery) is not performed. If the game is won, the selected number of games is set as the number of games in the AT state.

In the case of the AT game number lottery for the first AT state in the privilege period, 10 is set as the number of games in the AT state. If the specification is such that a large number of 10, 20, 30, 50, and 70 are selected for the initial AT state, there is a possibility that the frequency of continuous (additional) AT states cannot be increased, and the AT state starts. This is because the probability may be low. Further, in the case of the AT game number lottery for the last AT state (detailed later) in the privilege period, the 33-selection lottery and the 55-selection lottery are not performed. That is, in the AT game number lottery for the final AT state, first, one game number is selected from 10, 20, 30, 50, or 70. This is to execute the AT game number correction process (details will be described later) in the final AT state.

FIG. 36B is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the 33 selection lottery. In the 33-selection lottery of the present embodiment, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the set value is set 1, 3 or 5, the winning probability of the 33 selection lottery is 30%, and when the set value is set 2, 4 or 6, the winning probability of the 33 selection lottery is It is 70%. That is, when 33 is set as the number of games in the AT state, it can be estimated that there is a high probability that the set value is an even number. In other words, it can be said that the number of games 33 in the AT state is a number capable of determining whether the set value is odd or even.

FIG. 36 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the 55 selection lottery. 55 It is a schematic diagram explaining the content of a selection lottery. In the 55 selection lottery of the present embodiment, the winning probability is different depending on the set value. Specifically, when the set value is set 1, 2 or 3, the winning probability of the 55 selection lottery is 30%, and when the set value is set 4, 5 or 6, the winning probability of the 55 selection lottery is It is 70%. That is, when 55 is set as the number of games in the AT state, it can be estimated that the set value has a high probability of being set high. In other words, it can be said that the number of games 55 in the AT state is a number capable of determining whether the set value is a high setting or a low setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games 33 and 55 in the AT state is a set suggestion number suggesting a set value. The setting suggestion number 55 is a numerical value that gives more advantageous information to the player than the setting suggestion number 33.

37 (a) and 37 (b) are diagrams illustrating another example of the privilege period. As shown in FIG. 35A, it is assumed that the privilege period is recognized as a series of periods when the AT state and the expected state are alternately and repeatedly repeated. However, as shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, there are cases where it ends only in the AT state and the expected state, and there are cases where it ends only in the expected state.

FIG. 37C is a diagram showing a counting period c1 for counting the number of games in the privilege period. In the case of the present embodiment, the privilege period counter counts the number of games from the start of the privilege period, and when the value of the privilege period counter reaches 1000, the privilege period ends.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating the number of games in the AT state for the first time and the number of games in the AT state for the second and subsequent times during the privilege period.

FIG. 38A is a diagram illustrating the number of games in the first AT state and the number of games in the expected state after the end of the first AT state during the privilege period. Specifically, FIG. 38A shows the case where the number of games in the AT state for the first time is 10 and the number of games in the expected state thereafter is 10.

In the present embodiment, as described above, 10 games are set as the initial AT state in the privilege period. Then, when the first AT state ends after digesting 10 games of the specified number of games, the number of games in the expected state started after the first AT state is 10, based on the result of the expected number of games lottery. It is selected from 20 or 30 (see FIG. 35 (c)), but the probability that a short number of games, specifically 10, is selected is high. As a result, in the present embodiment, when the AT state for a short period is set in the privilege period, there is a high probability that the expected state for a short period is set. Since the first AT state is a short period, the number of medals obtained in the first AT state is not so large. Therefore, if the period of the expected state started after the first AT state is shortened and the number of medals lost in the expected state is reduced, the possibility that the player buys additional medals in the middle can be reduced.

It should be noted that the initial AT state may not be fixedly set to 10 games as in the present embodiment, but a short number of games may be set. For example, the number of games may be selected from 10, 20 or 30. Further, instead of increasing the probability that a short number of games is set with respect to the expected state after the first AT state, 10 games may be fixedly set.

Further, when the AT state is 10 games, 10 may be always selected as the period of the expected state. Further, when the AT state is 20 games, a number (10 or 20) of 20 games or less may be selected as the period of the expected state.

FIG. 38B is a diagram illustrating the number of games in the AT state after the second time in the privilege period and the number of games in the expected state after the AT state of the second transition is completed. Specifically, FIG. 38A shows the case where the number of games in the second AT state is 20 and the number of games in the expected state thereafter is 20.

In the present embodiment, the number of games other than 10 is set for the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. Specifically, the number of AT games is drawn, and the number of games is selected from 20, 30, 33, 50, 55 or 70. That is, since the second and subsequent AT states have a longer period than the first AT state, the number of medals that can be obtained in the second and subsequent AT states is larger than that in the first AT state. Then, when the second and subsequent AT states have exhausted the specified number of games and ended, the number of games in the expected state started after the second and subsequent AT states is 20 or 30 games by the expected number of games lottery. It is selected from. As a result, in the present embodiment, when the AT state for a long period is set in the privilege period, there is a high probability that the expected state for a long period is set. Since the AT state after the second time is a long period, the number of medals obtained in the AT state after the second time is large. Therefore, the period of the expected state that starts after the second and subsequent AT states is lengthened, and even if the number of medals lost in the expected state is increased, the possibility that the player buys additional medals in the middle can be reduced. ..

The number of games may be selected from 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55 or 70 for the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. In this case, since the probability that 10 is selected in the second and subsequent AT states is low, the probability that the number of medals that can be obtained in the second and subsequent AT states is high is high.

In addition, although FIG. 38 has described the case of shifting from the normal state to the AT state, the same applies to the case of shifting from the normal state to the AT state via the expected state. As the first AT state in the privilege period, the AT state after passing through the expected state may be set as the first AT state in the privilege period.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating in detail the AT transition lottery executed in the expected state. As described above, the AT transition lottery includes the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game in the expected state, the AT transition lottery 2 executed in each game in the expected state (excluding the first game), and the AT transition lottery 2. There is.

FIG. 39A is a table showing an example of the winning probability of the AT transition lottery. According to FIG. 39 (a), the winning probability of the AT transition lottery 1 is 1/6, and the winning probability of the AT transition lottery 2 is 1/50. This numerical value is much larger than the winning probability of the transition lottery 2 executed in the normal state. From this numerical value, it can be said that the expected state is a gaming state in which the transition to the AT state is easier than in the normal state.

FIG. 39B is a diagram showing the execution time of the AT transition lottery. As described above, the AT transition lottery 1 is executed in the first game that has transitioned to the expected state, and the AT transition lottery 2 is executed in each game (excluding the first game) in the expected state. The AT transition lottery 1 and the AT transition lottery 2 are executed at the start of the game, that is, at the time of operating the start lever.

FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram illustrating the number of stocks in the AT state. In the present embodiment, the right to shift to the AT state can be stocked, and a numerical value from 0 to 255 can be stored in the memory as the number of stocks. When the number of stocks is 1 or more, it is confirmed that the state shifts to the AT state after the expected state ends. That is, when the number of stocks is 1 or more, the next AT state is fixed.

FIG. 39 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the winning probability of the expected state end lottery. According to FIG. 39 (d), the winning probability of the expected state end lottery is 1/2. In the present embodiment, when the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the expected state end lottery is further executed, and it is determined whether or not the expected state is interrupted and the AT state is immediately started. If the expected state end lottery is won, the expected state is interrupted and the AT state is started immediately. If the expected state end lottery is not won, the expected state is continued and the specified number of games is exhausted. After that, the AT state is started. Since the expected state is the number of medals paid out <the number of medals inserted throughout the period, it is advantageous for the player to immediately start the AT state. In the expected state after the second AT state, the expected state end lottery is performed, and in the expected state after the first AT state, the expected state end lottery is not performed.

FIG. 39 (e) is a diagram illustrating two transition patterns in the case of transition from the expected state to the AT state.

Case 1 is a transition pattern in which the player shifts to the AT state after exhausting all the predetermined number of games. Specifically, Case 1 shows a case where the AT transition lottery 2 is won in the 15th game in the expected state in which 30 games are determined as the specified number of games, and the lottery for ending the expected state is not won. .. In this case, since the AT transition lottery 2 was won, it is confirmed that the game will shift to the AT state, but since the lottery for the end of the expected state was not won, the AT state is started after 30 games have been completed in the expected state. To do.

On the other hand, Case 2 is a transition pattern in which a predetermined number of games is interrupted and the game immediately shifts to the AT state. Specifically, Case 2 shows a case where the AT transition lottery 2 is won in the 15th game in the expected state in which the number of games of 30 games is defined, and the lottery for ending the expected state is won. In this case, since the AT transition lottery 2 was won and the expected state end lottery was also won, the expected state is ended in the 15th game, and the AT state is started from the next game.

As described above, in the expected state of the present embodiment, there are two cases, one is to shift to the AT state after completing the predetermined number of games, and the other is to interrupt the predetermined number of games and shift to the immediate AT state. There are two patterns.

However, in the expected state of 10 games, the pattern of Case 2 does not exist. That is, in the expected state of 10 games, even if the AT transition lottery 2 is won and the expected state end lottery is also won, the pattern 1 is selected, and the digestion of 10 games, which is the specified number of games, is required. This is because the expected state of 10 games is the expected state for the shortest period, so it is considered that the effect of reducing the number of medals is not so great even if the game is completed. In addition, in the expected state, it depends on the purpose of acquiring a large amount of stock in the AT state.

In the present embodiment, the AT transition lottery is executed in the expected state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT transition lottery 2 may be executed in the AT state. Even in the AT state, the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the transition time when shifting from the expected state to the AT state.

FIG. 40A is a timing chart when the AT transition lottery 1 is won and the transition to the AT state is determined. In this case, the number of stocks is 1 because the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game G1 in the expected state is won. After that, since the AT transition lottery 2 executed in the expected state was not won, the stock number was set to 0 after the specified number of games in the expected state was exhausted, and the AT state was started from the next game G2 of the game in which the expected state was completed. To start.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the AT transition lottery 1 is won, the next AT state is already confirmed at the start of the expected state, so the production during the expected state should be sharpened. Is possible.

FIG. 40B is a timing chart when the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the expected state end lottery is not won, and the transition to the AT state is determined. In this case, the number of stocks is 1 because the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game G1 in the expected state is not won, and then the AT transition lottery 2 executed in the expected game G3 is won. However, since the lottery for ending the expected state was not won, the number of stocks is set to 0 after the specified number of games in the expected state is exhausted, and the AT state is started from the next game G2 of the game in which the expected state has ended.

FIG. 40 (c) is a timing chart when the AT transition lottery 2 is won and the expected state end lottery is won and the transition to the AT state is determined. In this case, the number of stocks is 1 because the AT transition lottery 1 executed in the first game G1 in the expected state is not won, and then the AT transition lottery 2 executed in the expected game G3 is won. In addition, since the lottery for ending the expected state was also won, the expected state is ended in the game G3 in the expected state, the number of stocks is set to 0, and the AT state is started from the next game of the game G3.

As shown in FIG. 40 (c), when the expected state of the specified number of games is immediately terminated and the AT state is started, the disadvantageous state is terminated and the state shifts to the advantageous state. Therefore, from the viewpoint of winning medals. This is advantageous for the player, but it is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of granting the right to the AT state because the privilege of the AT transition lottery 2 executed every game in the expected state for the remaining period cannot be received.

FIG. 41 is a graph showing the relationship between the privilege period and the number of medals acquired, and is a diagram for explaining the number of medals acquired in the playability in which the AT state and the expected state are alternately continuous. Here, the number of medals won is calculated by the sum of the number of medals paid out and the number of medals inserted in each game. Here, the inclination s1 indicates the theoretical ball ejection inclination in the privilege period, and the inclination s2 indicates the ball ejection inclination in the AT state.

FIG. 41 (a) shows that the number of medals won increases in the AT state and the number of medals won decreases in the expected state during the privilege period. In a short period of time (for example, only the first AT state), the inclination s2> inclination s1, and the medals may increase beyond the theoretical payout inclination, but for a long period of time (for example, AT state and expected state). When viewed in a period (a period in which and is alternately continued a plurality of times), the ball ejection inclination of the entire privilege period becomes gentle and approaches the inclination s2. This is because a short-term expected state is set after a short-term AT state, and a long-term expected state is set after a long-term AT state.

FIG. 41 (b) shows this, and shows a case where the AT state and the expected state alternately end the privilege period five times in a row without shortening the expected state. In this way, if the race is completed without shortening the expected state, the chances of the AT transition lottery 2 increase, so that the probability of the next AT state occurring also increases. As a result, the probability that the AT state and the expected state are alternately repeated a plurality of times is high, and as a result, a long privilege period is formed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an increase in medals while the ball output rate approaches the inclination s1.

On the other hand, FIG. 41 (c) shows a case where the expected state is shortened and the AT state and the expected state alternately end the privilege period three times in a row. In this case, the number of medals won will increase in the short term, but the probability of the next AT state occurring will be low, so the continuity between the AT state and the expected state will be interrupted at a small number of times, and as a result, the privilege period Will end in a short period of time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a series of long privilege periods can be realized by completing the expected state in which the AT transition lottery can be received, and the ball ejection inclination can be approached to the theoretical ball ejection inclination s1. .. On the other hand, if the expected state is shortened, the number of medals won can be increased in the short term.

<Direction of normal game state>
Next, the production of the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48.

-Expected state effect FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram for explaining the expected state and normal state effects from the viewpoint of the presence or absence of operation navigation. As described above, the expected state and the normal state are game states in which the operation navigation is not executed. This is because the expected state and the normal state are gaming states for the purpose of suppressing medal payout.

Specifically, FIG. 42A shows the production of the game in which the small winning combination 3b is internally won in each of the expected state and the normal state. FIG. 42A shows that the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the expected state and the normal state is internally won. Although not shown in FIG. 42 (a), the operation navigation is executed in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the AT state is internally won. However, since this effect mode is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted (see FIG. 9).

Further, FIG. 42A shows that the story effect is executed in the expected state, and the story display d110 is performed on the effect image display device 157. FIG. 42B shows an example of the story display d110. The story effect of the present embodiment is a continuous effect that is executed over a specified number of games in the expected state, and is an effect that is expected to shift to the AT state.

In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is not executed in the normal state and the expected state, but the operation navigation may be executed with a low probability. The normal state and the expected state can improve the motivation to play while setting the game state for the purpose of suppressing the payout of medals.

FIG. 43A is a table showing the types of story effects. The story effect of the present embodiment is composed of six types of effects from story 1 to story 6. The story effect is set at the time of transition to the expected state.

The story 1 is a story effect set when the number of games in the expected state is 10 games, which is the minimum number of games. Story 1 is an effect suggesting that it is a short-term expected state after a short-term AT state. Therefore, the tension of the player may be increased in each game in the expected state.

The story 6 can be set when the AT state is fixed, and is a story effect indicating that the AT state is fixed (even if the AT state is fixed, another story effect is set. Sometimes). In the case of 10 games in which the expected number of games is the minimum number of games, the story 6 is not set even if the AT state is confirmed. That is, the story 6 is a story effect that is set when the period of the expected state is long. The player may feel bored if the period of the expected state in which the medals decrease is long, but the story effect of the story 6 can be executed to increase the motivation to play.

FIG. 43B is a timing chart showing an example of the story display d110 during the privilege period. Specifically, FIG. 43B shows the expected state period starting after the first AT state in the privilege period for 10 games, and the expected state period starting after the second AT state in the privilege period. An example of the story display in the case of 20 games is shown.

In this case, in the expected state of 10 games, the story display d110 of the story 1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This is because the story 1 is set when the number of games in the expected state is 10 games, which is the minimum number of games. By looking at the story display of story 1, the player can grasp that the expected state ends in a short period of time.

Further, in the expected state of 20 games, the story display d110 of the story 6 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This indicates that in the expected state of 20 games, the number of stocks is 1 at the start, and the next AT state is confirmed. By seeing the story display of the story 6, the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind because the period of the expected state becomes longer, but the next AT state is confirmed.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of the story display d110 in the privilege period when the AT transition lottery is won in the expected state started with the stock number 1 and the stock number becomes 2.

FIG. 44A shows the case where the story effect started from the game G11 is the story 6, and the story effect started from the game G13 is the story 6.

Since the expected state started from the game G11 is already the number of stocks 1 at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. Therefore, the story 6 indicating the confirmation of the next AT state is selected. It shows the case where it was done. As a result, the player grasps that the AT state is started when the expected state started from the game G11 ends. Next, since the expected state started from the game G11 wins the AT transition lottery 2 and the expected state end lottery in the game G12, the expected state is interrupted and ended, and the AT state is started. As a result, the player can grasp that another AT state is confirmed in addition to the AT state starting from the next game of the game G12.

Since the expected state started from the game G13 has 1 stock at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. Therefore, the case where the story 6 indicating the confirmation of the AT state next time is selected is shown. As a result, the player can reconfirm that the AT state is started when the expected state started from the game G13 ends.

FIG. 44B shows the case where the story effect started from the game G11 is story 3, and the story effect started from game G13 is story 6.

Since the expected state started from the game G11 has 1 stock at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. However, it shows the case where the story 3 is selected as the story effect. In this case, the player cannot grasp whether or not the AT state is started even if the expected state started from the game G11 ends. Next, since the expected state started from the game G11 wins the AT transition lottery 2 and the expected state end lottery in the game G12, the expected state is interrupted and ended, and the AT state is started. As a result, the player can win the AT state transition lottery in the game G12 and grasp that the transition to the AT state has been decided.

Since the expected state started from the game G13 has 1 stock at the start time, the transition to the AT state is confirmed after the expected state ends. Therefore, the case where the story 6 indicating the confirmation of the AT state next time is selected is shown. As a result, the player can grasp that the AT state is started when the expected state started from the game G13 ends. Further, the player can confirm that the AT state is actually confirmed even in the expected state starting from the game G11.

In the present embodiment, the story effect is performed in the expected state, but the story effect may be performed in the AT state. In this case, the story effect may be a continuous story effect in a plurality of AT states. For example, the first episode of the story production is executed in the first AT game, the second episode of the story production is executed in the second AT game, and the third episode of the story production is executed in the third AT game. By continuing, the story production may be executed according to the number of times the AT game is executed. Then, when the final story of the story production is executed, the privilege period ends and the normal period starts with the AT game. According to this, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the privilege period.

-AT state effect FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of an AT game number notification effect d120 executed in the AT state.

The AT game number notification effect d120 is an effect of notifying the number of games and the number of remaining games during the entire AT state. In the AT game number notification effect d120, the effect image display device 157 displays the total number of games display d121 that displays the total number of games during the AT state, the remaining game number display d122 that displays the number of remaining games in the AT state, and the like. Further, in the AT game number notification effect d120, in addition to (1) the case where the total number of games display d121 is performed only in the first game in the AT state (hereinafter, referred to as the case where the total number of games is notified at one time), (2) ) There is a case where the total number of games display d121 is divided into a plurality of times including the first game (hereinafter, referred to as a case where the total number of games is notified by dividing into a plurality of times).

The number of notifications of the total number of games and the numerical value (number of games) of the total number of games display d121 when the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times are the notification patterns of the notification number table stored in advance in the memory. It is decided according to.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the notification number table. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notification number table. For example, when the period of the AT state is 70 games (normal number), as shown in FIG. 46 (a-2), a plurality of types of notification patterns are stored for 70 games and are determined by lottery. It is determined based on the number of notification patterns. The notification pattern shown in FIG. 45 (b) is the NO. It is 2 and is a pattern of notifying in two times. No. 46 (a-2). The notification pattern of 2 is a pattern in which 70 is divided into 20 and 50 for notification, and the number of games notified at the first time is 20 and the number of games notified at the second time is 70 (= 20 + 50).

Here, when the total number of games is displayed at one time in the AT game number notification effect d120, for example, when the period of the AT state is 70 games (normal number), 70 games are shown in the first game in the AT state. The total number of games is displayed d121. Further, when the period of the AT state is 55 games (setting suggested number), the total number of games display d121 indicating 55 games is performed in the first game of the AT state.

In the following, a case where the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times will be described. When the total number of games is displayed d121 in a plurality of times in the AT game number notification effect d120, the total number of games in the correct AT state period is notified in the final round, and the false AT state period other than the final round. Notifies the total number of games (a number smaller than the number of games in the AT state left at the time of notification). Further, when the numerical value indicating the period of the AT state is a normal number and the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times, the suggested number of settings is not notified in each notification of the total number of games. This is because if the normal number is notified after the setting suggestion number is notified, the player will be misunderstood.

FIG. 45 (a) is a timing chart relating to game progress when the period of the AT state is 70 games (normal number), and FIG. 45 (b) shows each game G21 to G26-shown in FIG. 45 (a). It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the AT game number notification effect d120 of E. The games G21 to G26-S shown in FIG. 45A indicate the start of the game, and G26-E indicates the end of the game.

The example shown in FIG. 45B shows a case where the total number of games is notified in two steps. Specifically, this is a case where 20 games are displayed on the first total number of games display d121 and 70 correct answers are displayed on the second total number of games display d121.

First, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G21 that has started the AT state, and displays 20 games. As a result, the player grasps that the period of the AT state starting from now on is 20 games.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating 19 games in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G22, which is the second game in the AT state.

As the game progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G23, which is the 20th game in the AT state.

In the present embodiment, when the number of games indicated by the remaining game number display d122 is 3 or less, the number color of the remaining game number display d122 is a special color (for example, until then, the number was displayed in black). , Red as a special color, etc.), and the AT continuation suggestion effect that incites the continuation or termination of the AT state is executed. In the AT continuation suggestion effect, the AT continuation suggestion image d122S is displayed on the effect image display device 157. That is, the remaining game number display d122 in the game G23 is also the AT continuation suggestion display d122S. By seeing the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue, although the number of games remaining in the AT state based on the notification is several games.

The AT continuation suggestion display d122S of the present embodiment is an image display that changes the color of the number of the remaining game number display d122 to a conspicuous color, but the effect mode of the AT continuation suggestion effect is not limited to this. The AT continuation suggestion display d122S may be an image display that is executed over a plurality of games when the number of remaining games is equal to or less than the threshold value. For example, the number of characters appearing increases as the number of games in the AT state progresses. It may be used as a production image, or the number of the remaining games displayed d122 may be displayed by increasing the size of the number of the remaining games displayed d122 and adding an effect display around the number of the remaining games displayed d122. You may make noticeable changes.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the second total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G24, which is the next game of the game G23 (21st game in the AT state), and displays a display indicating 70 games. Do. The second total number of games display d121 indicates the correct number of games during the entire period of the AT state. As a result, the player grasps that the AT state will continue in the future and that the first total number of games display d121 is an erroneous number. Further, since the slot machine 100 has 50 remaining games in the AT state, the remaining game number display d122 indicating 50 games is performed.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating 49 games in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G25, which is the 22nd game in the AT state.

As the game further progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-S, which is the 70th game in the AT state.

The remaining game number display d122 in the game G26 is not the AT continuation suggestion display d122S of a special color. That is, when 70 is displayed on the second total number of games display d121, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is not performed even if the number of remaining games in the AT state based on the notification is equal to or less than the threshold value. This is because 70 shown in the second total number of games display d121 is a number indicating the longest period of the AT state, so that it is not necessary to execute the AT continuation suggestion effect any more.

Finally, the slot machine 100 displays a character image indicating the end of the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-E, which is the end of the game G26. As a result, the player knows that the AT state is terminated.

In addition, although FIG. 45 shows the case where the total number of games is notified in two times, it is needless to say that the total number of games may be notified in three or more times. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (a-2), when the period of the AT state is 70 games, the 70 games are divided into 10, 20, and 40, and the first total number of games is notified for the 10th and 2nd times. The total number of games may be notified as 20 and the third total number of games may be notified as 70.

FIG. 47 (a) is a timing chart relating to game progress when the period of the AT state is 20 games (normal number), and FIG. 47 (b) shows each game G21 to G26-shown in FIG. 47 (a). It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the AT game number notification effect d120 in E. The games G21 to G26-S shown in FIG. 47A indicate the start of the game, and G26-E indicates the end of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the case where the total number of games is notified is shown in two steps. Specifically, the number of notifications in the notification number table shown in FIG. The notification pattern when 2 is selected is shown. Specifically, this is a case where 10 games are displayed on the first total number of games display d121 and 20 correct answers are displayed on the second total number of games display d121. In FIG. 47, the difference from FIG. 45 will be mainly described.

First, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G21 that has started the AT state, and displays 10 games. As a result, the player grasps that the period of the AT state starting from now on is 10 games.

As the game progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G23, which is the tenth game in the AT state. The remaining game number display d122 is an AT continuation suggestion display d122S. By looking at the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue, although there are several games remaining in the AT state based on the notification.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the second total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G24, which is the next game of the game G23 (11th game in the AT state), and displays 20 games. The second total number of games display d121 displays the correct number of games for the entire period of the AT state. As a result, the player knows that the AT state will continue in the future and that the first total number of games display d121 is an erroneous number. Further, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating 10 games.

As the game further progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-S, which is the 20th game in the AT state. Here, the remaining game number display d122 in the game G26 is also the AT continuation suggestion display d122S. That is, when 20 is displayed on the second total number of games display d121, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is performed when the number of remaining games in the AT state based on the notification is equal to or less than the threshold value. The 20 shown in the second total number of games display d121 is not a number indicating the longest period of the AT state, and is therefore to suggest the possibility of performing the third total number of games display d121. By looking at the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue even though the number of remaining games in the AT state based on the notification is one game.

However, the slot machine 100 displays a character image indicating the end in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-E, which is the end of the game G26. As a result, the player knows that the AT state is terminated.

FIG. 48 (a) is a timing chart relating to game progress when the period of the AT state is 55 games (number of suggested settings), and FIG. 48 (b) is an AT game in each game shown in FIG. 48 (a). It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the number notification effect d120. The games G21 to G26-S shown in FIG. 48A indicate the start of the game, and G26-E indicates the end of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 48, the case where the total number of games is notified in two steps is shown. For details, see No. 1 in the notification frequency table shown in FIG. 46 (b-2). The notification pattern when 2 is selected is shown. Specifically, this is a case where 20 games are displayed on the first total number of games display d121 and 55 correct answers are displayed on the second total number of games display d121. In FIG. 48, the differences from FIGS. 45 and 47 will be mainly described.

First, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number of games display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G21 that has started the AT state, and displays 20 games. As a result, the player grasps that the period of the AT state starting from now on is 20 games.

As the game progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G23, which is the 20th game in the AT state. The remaining game number display d122 is an AT continuation suggestion display d122S. By looking at the AT continuation suggestion display d122S, the player expects that the AT state will continue even though the number of games remaining in the AT state based on the notification is one game.

Next, the slot machine 100 performs the second total number display d121 in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G24, which is the next game of the game G23 (21st game in the AT state), and displays 55 games. The second total number of games display d121 displays the correct number of games for the entire period of the AT state. As a result, the player knows that the AT state will continue in the future and that the first total number of games display d121 is an erroneous number.

As the game further progresses, the slot machine 100 performs the remaining game number display d122 indicating one game in the AT game number notification effect d120 of the game G26-S, which is the 55th game in the AT state.

The remaining game number display d122 in the game G26 is not the AT continuation completion suggestion display d122S. There are certainly more than 55 games in the AT state (eg 70 games). However, since 55, which is the set suggestion number, is displayed in the second total number of games display d121, when the third total number of games display d121 is performed after the set suggestion number is displayed, the second total number of games display d121 is displayed. This is because the displayed number is denied, and the player is skeptical as to whether or not the set value suggested in the second total game number display d121 is also denied.

In the present embodiment, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is not displayed after the set suggested number is displayed on the total game number display d121, but apart from this, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S is displayed under certain conditions. It may be displayed. For example, if there is a set suggestion number that notifies information that is more advantageous than the set suggestion number displayed on the total game number display d121, the AT continuation suggestion display d122S may be displayed thereafter. Specifically, even if 33 is displayed on the total number of games display d121, 55 may be displayed on the AT continuation suggestion display d122S thereafter. This is because 55, which is larger than 33, exists in the setting suggestion number of this embodiment. Further, if 55 is more likely to be set higher than 33, it will be advantageous information for the player.

Further, in the AT continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 45 to 48, the effect of changing the display mode of the remaining game number display d122 has been described, but the notification mode of the AT continuation suggestion effect is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49A, a plurality of types of AT continuation suggestion effects may be provided, and one AT continuation suggestion effect may be selected from the plurality of types. In FIG. 49 (a), when (1) the set suggested number 33 or 55 is displayed on the total number of games display d121, the AT continuation suggestion effect is not executed thereafter, but (2) the total number of games is displayed d121. When a number other than 33 and 55 is displayed in, it indicates that one of a plurality of types of AT continuation suggestion effects is selected and the selected AT continuation suggestion effect is executed (AT continuation). / The end suggestion effect may not be executed).

For example, as shown in FIG. 49B, when two types of AT continuation suggestion effects are prepared and the set suggestion number is notified in the next total number of games display d121, the probability that the effect A is selected is produced. If B is set to be higher than the probability of being selected, but the number of suggested suggestions is not notified in the next total number of games display d121, the probability of selecting effect B is higher than the probability of selecting effect A. May be set to be higher. When the effect A is executed as the AT continuation suggestion effect, the player can raise the expectation. Whether or not to notify the set suggestion number on the total number of games display d121 is based on the notification pattern determined by the lottery process using the notification number table described above.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the effect A sets the display color of the number of remaining games in the AT state to red and the execution period of the effect is 5 games, while the effect B is the remaining games in the AT state. The display color of the number may be green, and the execution period of the effect may be three games, which is a shorter effect period than the effect A. That is, the effect A may be a more conspicuous effect in terms of color and execution period than the effect B.

In the AT game number notification effect of the present embodiment, when the total number of games is notified in a plurality of times, the total number of games is notified a plurality of times over the plurality of games, but as shown in FIG. 50, 1 The total number of games may be notified a plurality of times in the game. In the modified example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the total number of games is notified in two times is shown, 20 games are displayed in the first total number of games display d121, and the correct answer is displayed in the second total number of games display d121. It shows the case of displaying 70 games of.

More specifically, the slot machine 100 performs the first total number of games display d121 at the time t31 of the start lever operation of the game that started the AT state in the AT game number notification effect d120, and then performs the AT game number notification effect. At the time point t33 after the development, the second total number display d121 is performed. In this way, the total number of games from the second time onward may be notified according to the progress of the production instead of the progress of the game.

<Last AT state>
Next, the last AT state in the privilege period will be described. Here, the final AT state of the privilege period is, for example, an AT state set as one set of 50 games (the number may be added), and the normal state is started after the AT state ends. AT state, that is, when the number of games in the privilege period reaches the limiter, or when it is decided that the normal period will start after the AT state ends because the number of games in the privilege period is near the limiter. Means the AT state of. In the present embodiment, a process for correcting the number of AT games (hereinafter referred to as an AT game number correction process) may be executed for the final setting of the AT state.

FIG. 51 (a) is a diagram illustrating an outline of the AT game number correction process. The number of AT games in the AT state starting from the game G41 was 70 games as a result of the AT game number lottery (see FIG. 36), but when 70 games from the game G41 are exhausted, 1000 games which is a limiter of the privilege period (Game G44> 1000). Therefore, in such a case, in the present embodiment, the AT game number correction process is executed to correct the set number of AT games. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (a), 70 games are corrected to 50 games, the number of AT games in the last AT state is set to 50, and the AT state and privilege period are ended in the game G42 1000 games before. are doing.

When correcting the number of AT games with respect to the setting of the final AT state, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), the number of AT games is set to the number of remaining games up to 1000 games (games G41 to G43). There is also an idea to end the AT state by correcting to (the number of games up to) and exhausting 1000 games during the privilege period. However, in the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), the AT state is terminated before the limiter. This is because the possibility that the corrected halfway number of AT games becomes the set suggestion number cannot be excluded.

In addition, when the last AT state is ended before the limiter, the expected state is set after the last AT state is finished even if the number of games up to the limiter is small, and the limiter is reached in the expected state. Although there is an idea of ending the privilege period in the expected state, in the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b-2), the last one is before the limiter. The AT state and the privilege period are terminated at the same time. That is, the AT state is prevented from ending in the expected state when the number of games up to the limiter is small. This is because the expected state is the period when the number of medals is reduced, so that the player does not feel lost near the limiter and the privilege period ends comfortably when the most medals are won.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the content of the AT game number correction process when the number of AT games in the AT state is determined to be 70 games as a result of the AT game number lottery. The numerical values shown in FIG. 52 are examples and are not limited thereto.

For example, when the AT state is started when the number of digested games in the privilege period is less than 855 games, 70 games are set without correction, and when the number of digested games in the privilege period starts in 885-914 games, the AT state is started. Is corrected and 50 games are set.

In the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, if the number of AT games obtained by the AT game number lottery is the same, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the number of remaining AT games up to the limiter is large at that time. The more, the number of AT games in the AT state is corrected so that the privilege period becomes shorter. That is, according to the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment, if the number of AT games before correction is the same, the longer the period of the last set AT state, the shorter the privilege period as a result, and the setting is made. The shorter the period of the last AT state, the longer the privilege period tends to be as a result. This is to allow the player to comfortably end the AT state and suppress the number of medals paid out.

In the present embodiment, the set suggestion number is not selected in the AT game number lottery for the last AT state, but the set suggestion number may be selected separately. However, when the set suggestion number is selected for the last AT state, the normal number closest to the set suggestion number and smaller than the set suggestion number is selected again, and this normal number is selected as the last AT. It is set as the number of AT games for the state.

FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a setting suggestion effect executed after the end of the last AT state of the privilege period. FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. 53 (b) is a diagram for explaining the type of the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggestion effect is an effect using a character, and the effect image display device 157 displays a character image d130 for displaying the character. As shown in FIG. 53A, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the third stop operation of the final game in the final AT state. When executing the setting suggestion effect, one of the characters is determined from a plurality of characters based on the character lottery, and the setting suggestion effect based on the determined character is executed.

FIG. 53B is a diagram illustrating a plurality of characters appearing in the setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, the characters 1, 2 and 3 are characters that do not suggest a set value, and the characters 4, 5 and 6 are characters that suggest a set value. For example, (1) character 4 is selected with a 10% probability when the set value is even, and (2) character 5 is selected with a 20% probability when the set value is 4, 5 or 6. (3) Character 6 may be selected with a probability of 20% when the set value is 5 or 6. The player can estimate the set value by looking at the character image d130 of the setting suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the last AT state is finished. Therefore, when the remaining game number display d122 of the AT game number notification effect d120 described above is executed in the last AT state, the setting suggestion number is set. It is desirable not to display it. This is because if the number of setting suggestions is notified in the final AT state, the expectation of the setting suggestion effect cannot be increased even if the setting suggestion effect is subsequently executed. For example, if the last AT state is 55 games (number of suggested settings), the probability that the set value is high when it is displayed that there are 55 games remaining at the start of the last AT state. Is estimated to be high. In addition, even if it is planned to execute the setting suggestion effect after the last AT state is finished, it does not provide useful information to the player who sees the effect.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a modified example of the execution time of the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment is executed after the last AT state is completed as shown in FIG. 54 (a), but is executed in the last AT state as shown in FIG. 54 (b). May be good.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 according to the present embodiment (fifth embodiment) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 55 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S501. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S502, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S503, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined. In this embodiment, 1 to 3 medals can be inserted.

In step S504, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is performed.

In step S505, the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S504, and the internal lottery is performed. Preparations are made for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

Here, the internal lottery command when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won will be described. When the AT system game state is in the AT state and the small winning combination 3a to 3f are internally won. Information indicating that the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f has been internally elected is transmitted to.

In step S506, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

Further, in step S505, a lottery process relating to the AT-type game state is executed. For example, in the normal state, the transition lottery 1 and 2 are executed, and in the expected state, the AT transition lottery 1 or 2 is executed. If the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the expected state end lottery is executed.

In step S507, the main control unit / operation condition display setting process for setting the operation navigation of the main control unit 300 is executed. In the main control unit / operation condition display setting process, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the AT state, and the operation navigation is set in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 300 is executed (see FIGS. 9A and 9C).

In step S508, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S509, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S510. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S510, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a pattern combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Further, in step S510, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S511, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S512, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state (RT system game state, AT system game state) is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S502 and repeating the above-described processing.

The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S1006 of FIG. 16) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described above.

<Game state control processing>
Next, the game state control process will be described with reference to FIG. 56A. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the game state control process in step S512 of FIG. 55.

In step S601, the RT system game state control process is performed.

In step S602, AT-based game state control processing (details will be described later) is performed.

In step S603, preparations are made for transmitting the game state command to the first sub-control unit 400. Here, the game state commands include the RT-type game state, the AT-type game state, the total number of AT games, the number of remaining AT games, the number of stocks in the AT state, the notification pattern of the number of AT games, and the type of story production. Information such as is included.

<AT-based game state control processing>
Next, the AT-based game state control process will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (b). FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the game state control process of the AT system in step S602 of FIG. 56.

In step S701, the result of the lottery process relating to the transition to the game state of the AT system executed in step S505 is acquired. For example, in the normal state, the results of the transition lottery 1 and 2, and in the expected state, the results of the AT transition lottery 1 or 2 are acquired. Further, when the AT transition lottery 2 is won, the result of the expected state end lottery is acquired.

In step S702, the state transition process A for setting the AT system game state is executed based on the result of the lottery process related to the AT system game state transition. In the state transition process A, for example, when the transition lottery 1 is won in step S701, the expected number of games lottery is executed to determine the number of games in the expected state, and the AT-type game state is set to the expected state. Further, for example, when the transition lottery 2 and the T transition lottery 1 or 2 are won in step S701, the AT game number lottery is executed to determine the number of games in the AT state. Then, when the transition lottery 2 is won or the AT transition lottery 2 is won and the expected state end lottery is won, the AT system game state is set to the AT state. Further, when setting the AT state, a lottery process using the notification number table is executed to determine the production mode of the AT game number notification effect d120 (the total number of games is notified once or multiple times. Whether to notify the total number of games, etc.).

In step S703, counting processing is performed. In the counting process, for example, when the privilege period is in effect, the value of the privilege period counter is incremented. Further, for example, in the case of the expected state, the value of the counter that counts the number of games in the expected state (hereinafter referred to as the expected state counter) is incremented, and in the case of the AT state, the counter that counts the number of games in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as the counter). , AT status counter) is incremented.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the counter value counted up in step S703 has reached a threshold value for shifting the AT system gaming state (hereinafter, state shift value). When the counter value reaches the state transition value, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the AT system game state control process is terminated.

In step S705, the state transition process B for setting the game state of the AT system is executed based on the counter value in step 703. In the state transition process B, for example, when the value of the privilege period counter reaches the limiter during the privilege period, the game state of the AT system is set to the normal state. Further, when the value of the expected state counter reaches the specified number of games in the expected state with the stock number 0, the AT system game state is set to the normal state, while the stock number 1 or more in the expected state. When the value of the expected state counter reaches the specified number of games, the game state of the AT system is set to the AT state. Further, when the value of the AT state counter reaches the specified number of games in the AT state, the game state of the AT system is set to the expected state.

<Internal lottery command processing>
Next, the internal lottery command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). The internal lottery command process is a process corresponding to the internal lottery command in the command process of step S3004 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the internal lottery command processing in detail.

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system is the AT state. If the game state of the AT system is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3302, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) has been won based on the internal lottery command. If the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won, the process proceeds to step S3303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3303, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed with the operation order of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) internally won as the content of the operation navigation. For example, when the small winning combination 3b is internally won, the effect setting of the operation navigation indicating the operation order of "right, left, middle" is performed. As a result, the operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed (see FIGS. 9B and 9C).

In step S3304, other internal lottery command processing is executed.

<Game status command processing>
Next, the game state command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). The internal lottery command process is a process corresponding to the game state command in the command process of step S3004 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the game state command processing in detail.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system has been updated to the expected state in the game state control process of the game. If the expected state is updated in the game, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3402, the story effect is set so that the story effect is executed from the next game. The type of story effect is based on the information contained in the game state control command. As a result, the story effect by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is executed from the next game (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

On the other hand, in step S3403, it is determined whether or not the game state of the AT system has been updated to the AT state in the game state control process of the game. If it is updated to the AT state in the game, the process proceeds to step S3404, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3404, the AT game number notification effect is set so that the AT game number notification effect is executed from the next game. The production mode of the AT game number notification effect is determined based on the information included in the game state control command. As a result, from the next game, the AT game number notification effect is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIGS. 45 (b), 47 (b), and 48 (b)).

In step S3405, other game state command processing is executed.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the configuration of the AT system gaming state.

FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment (this embodiment).

In the sixth embodiment, the configurations, functions, and processes different from those in the fifth embodiment will be mainly described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The AT-based gaming state of the present embodiment includes a normal state, an expected state (CZ), an AT state, and an AT state (ending). That is, the AT-based gaming state of the present embodiment is characterized by including an AT state (ending).

The AT state (ending) is a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed, as in the AT state. The AT state (ending) is a state in which the number of medals paid out> the number of medals inserted, and the number of medals of the player increases. Further, the AT state (ending) is a state in which a continuous effect that is not executed in other AT states is executed. In addition, when the AT state (ending) ends, an AT end effect indicating the end of the privilege period is performed before starting the normal state. The AT state (ending) is a period during which the freeze process or the AT state addition process, which may be executed in other AT states, is not executed. Since it is a period in which the end of the AT state is imminent, the period is set so that the delay processing or the excessive fanning processing of the game contrary to the purpose of ending the AT state is not executed.

The AT state (ending) is set when the number of digested games in the privilege period reaches 990 games in the AT state. Then, when 10 games are exhausted in the AT state (ending), that is, when the number of digested games in the privilege period reaches 1000 games and the limiter in the privilege period is reached, the AT state (ending) is ended and the normal Move to the state. As described above, since the AT state (ending) is a fixed period of 10 games, if the AT state (ending) is entered, 1000 games can be reliably consumed in the privilege period.

For example, if only the right is obtained until the number of games in the privilege period reaches 991 games, the AT state (ending) is set when the number of digested games reaches 990 games, and the subsequent 10 games are set to the AT state (ending). Become. When there is a limiter in the privilege period, it may not be possible to give the player a feeling of loss even if the limiter is reached and ended. When a game with one or two bets is played in the AT state (ending), the fixed period of the AT state (ending) is not changed. This is because it is not preferable to change the number of games because the continuous production corresponding to the fixed period of 10 games is executed.

Further, in the AT state (ending) of the present embodiment, since the completion of the privilege period is guaranteed, the lottery for newly granting the AT right (for example, the AT transition lottery) is not executed in the AT state (ending). .. If the result of executing the lottery and granting the AT right is notified, the player may feel lost when the limiter is reached and the end is completed, but the lottery for newly granting the AT right is not executed. As a result, the privilege period can be comfortably ended.

FIG. 59A is a diagram showing a count period c1 for counting the number of games in the privilege period and a count period c2 for counting the number of games in the AT state (ending). In the case of the present embodiment, the privilege period counter counts the number of games from the start of the privilege period, and when the value of the privilege period counter reaches 1000, the AT state (ending) is terminated together with the privilege period. When the value of the privilege period counter reaches 990, the AT state (ending) is set, the ending counter starts counting the number of games in the AT state (ending) from the next game, and the value of the ending counter becomes 10. When it arrives, the privilege period ends with the AT status (ending).

FIG. 59 (b) is a threshold value referred to by the privilege period counter that counts the count period c1, and FIG. 59 (c) is a threshold value that the ending counter that counts the count period c2 refers to. These thresholds are stored in ROM 306 in advance. The first threshold value shown in FIG. 59 (b) is a numerical value for starting the AT state (ending) and starting counting of the ending counter, and the second threshold value is a numerical value for ending the privilege period. The threshold value shown in FIG. 59 (c) is a numerical value for ending the AT state (ending).

The state immediately before the AT state (ending) is always the AT state and does not become the expected state. This is because the expected state is a period during which the number of medals is reduced, and if there is an expected state before the AT state (ending) is started, the player may feel lost. That is, when the AT state (ending) is not executed in the state immediately before the AT state (ending), the expected state is not reached when the AT state is ended, and the privilege state is ended and the normal state is reached.

Considering that there is an AT state (ending) next to the AT state, the AT state ends without displaying the display related to the number of medals acquired by the player before the start of the AT state (ending) in the AT state. It will be displayed in the next game (starting game in the normal state). When the AT state (ending) is started after the AT state, the AT state (ending) can be started without displaying the number of medals won by the player once, and the AT state (ending) ends. Sometimes it is possible to display the number of medals won by the player. On the other hand, when the AT state (ending) is not started after the AT state, the number of medals won by the player can be displayed at the end of the AT state.

FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing an outline of the AT state (ending) end determination process of the present embodiment. The AT state (ending) end determination process is one process included in the game state control process (step S512 in FIG. 55).

In the AT state (ending) end determination process of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value by the ending counter has reached 10 (step S1), and when the counter value by the ending counter reaches 10 (step). In S1: YES), the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated. Therefore, when the ending counter is operating normally, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated without using the privilege period counter.

On the other hand, when the counter value by the ending counter does not reach 10 (step S1: NO), it is determined whether or not the counter value by the privilege period counter has reached 1000 (step S2), and the privilege period counter. When the counter value of 1000 is reached (step S2: YES), the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated. Therefore, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated by using the privilege period counter when the ending counter is not operating normally. Step S2 is provided in preparation for such an unforeseen situation.

FIG. 60B is a timing chart showing a state in which the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated based on the counter value of the privilege period counter under the condition that the ending counter is not operating normally. In this way, even when the ending counter is not operating normally, since the privilege period counter exists, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period can be surely ended.

Although not shown, a separate counter independent of the privilege period counter may be provided to count the privilege period. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, even if the ending counter malfunctions, the privilege period and the AT state (ending) can be ended by the privilege period counter. Since the ending counter starts counting based on the value of the privilege period counter, if the privilege period counter malfunctions, the ending counter may also be affected by this malfunction. Therefore, another counter is provided for further certainty. In this case, even if a problem occurs in the privilege period counter and the ending counter, the privilege period and the AT state (ending) can be terminated.

In this embodiment, the limiter of the privilege period is limited to the number of digested games, but if the limiter of the privilege period has other conditions (for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals won, etc.) in addition to the number of digested games, It is preferable that this other counter counts an index (for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals won, etc.) different from the index (for example, the number of games) counted by the privilege period counter.

FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an outline of the production of the AT state (ending).

In the AT state (ending), one episode of continuous production (hereinafter referred to as ending production) is executed for each game over 10 games. In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 61A, the number of games displaying the number of games in the AT state (ending) image d140 (for example, in the case of the first game in the AT state (ending), the first episode, 1 / A character image such as 10) is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This is to make the player recognize the number of remaining games in the AT state (ending).

The number of games image d140 does not display the number of games during the privilege period. This is because if there are a plurality of types of game number displays, the player is deprived of attention to grasping the numerical value and cannot enjoy the game. That is, the value of the ending counter is displayed on the game number image d140 of the present embodiment, and the value of the privilege period counter is not displayed.

FIG. 61B is a diagram showing in detail the content of the ending effect of the tenth game in the AT state (ending). In the tenth game in the AT state (ending), the slot machine 100 displays the number of games image d140 showing the ten games based on the start lever operation, and the final game showing that it is the final game in the AT state (ending). The preview image d150 (for example, a character image such as "last game") is displayed on the effect image display device 157. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the AT state (ending) ends in the game at the start of the game.

The final game preview image d150 whose display has started is erased when a predetermined time T1 (for example, about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start lever operation. Here, the predetermined time T1 is set shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation.

In the ending effect of the present embodiment, the number of games image d140 is displayed over 10 games, but the number of games displaying the number of games image d140 is not limited to this. For example, the number of games image d140 may be displayed from the sixth game to the fifth game in the AT state (ending). That is, in this case, the number of games in the AT state (ending) is not displayed until the last 5 games in the AT state (ending) are reached. By shortening the effect period with story, it is possible to shorten the period for consciousness of the end of the AT state (ending).

FIG. 62A shows the operation order of the operation navigation in the first stop operation when the player internally wins the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the final game in the AT state (ending) and executes the operation navigation. The timing chart is shown when a stop operation that does not comply (stop operation with incorrect answer) is performed.

In this case, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the operation navigation image d10, the number of games image d140 showing 10 games, and the final game preview image d150 based on the start lever operation, and after a predetermined time T1 has elapsed from the start lever operation. , The display of the final game preview image d150 is erased, and the display of the operation navigation image d10 is erased based on the first stop operation of the incorrect answer. As a result, since the ending game number image d140 is erased during the first stop operation, the impression of the last game can be weakened even if there is a mistake in the stop operation.

Since the predetermined time T1 is shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation, even if there is a mistake in the stop operation during the first stop operation, the operation navigation The display of the final game preview image d150 is erased before the display of the image d10 is erased. Therefore, it may be difficult to give the impression that the state of the last game continues even after the mistake of the stop operation. In addition to the case where the first stop operation is an incorrect answer operation, the second stop operation and the third stop operation may be an incorrect answer operation, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed. Occasionally, since the display of the final game preview image d150 is erased, it may be difficult to give the impression that the state of the last game continues even after the mistake of the stop operation.

The predetermined time T1 may be set to about 2.0 seconds from the start lever operation. When the time from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation is T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds), the display of the final game preview image d150 can be erased after the first stop operation is performed. The time is higher than half of the time required for one game (about 4.1 seconds), so the impression of the last game may be weakened.

Here, a mistake in the stop operation means that as a result of performing an operation that does not perform an operation according to the operation navigation image d10 (an image suggesting the pressing order), the player does not have or reduces the number of medals that can be obtained. To do. For example, if the operation navigation image d10 is not an image suggesting the push order but an image suggesting an internal winning combination or an image designating a stop symbol, the profit obtained by the player as a result of the operation not following this is obtained. It also includes being absent or less. In other words, a mistake in the stop operation may be an operation that causes a so-called omission in which the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination cannot be won, or if there are multiple types of internal winning combination, among the internal winning combination. In some cases, it is not possible to win a prize for the symbol combination related to the most advantageous role for the player.

FIG. 62B is a timing chart of a modified example in which the erasing timing of the final game preview image d150 is not the time but the content of the stop operation. Similar to FIG. 62 (a), FIG. 62 (b) is also the case where the player internally wins the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the final game in the AT state (ending) and executes the operation navigation, and the player stops first. The case where a stop operation (incorrect stop operation) that does not follow the operation order of the operation navigation is performed in the operation is shown.

In this case, the display of the final game preview image d150 is erased based on the first stop operation of the incorrect answer. When the correct stop operation is performed, the display of the final game preview image d150 is deleted after the third stop operation.

In addition to the case where the first stop operation is an incorrect answer operation, the second stop operation and the third stop operation may be an incorrect answer operation, but the first stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. The display of the final game preview image d150 is erased (not shown) based on the operation of the incorrect answer as in the case of. Further, based on the operation of stopping the incorrect answer, both the display of the final game preview image d150 and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. As long as the correct stop operation is performed, the display of the operation navigation corresponding to the stop button (any of the stop buttons 137 to 139) that performed the stop operation is deleted, and the display of the operation navigation corresponding to the remaining stop operation remains. However, when an incorrect stop operation is performed, the display of the operation navigation corresponding to the stop operation remaining at that time is deleted. Therefore, if the display of the final game preview image d150 at that time is also erased, many displays will be erased all at once from the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. That is, it becomes easy to notice that the display of the final game preview image d150 has disappeared. This may give the impression that it is no longer the final game.

<Last AT state, AT state (ending)>
FIG. 63A is a diagram illustrating an outline of the AT game number correction process of the present embodiment. The AT game number correction process of the present embodiment is substantially the same as the content of the AT game number correction process of the fifth embodiment, but as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), 10 games are played after the AT state. Since there is a fixed AT state (ending), when correcting the number of AT games, the correction value is determined in consideration of 10 games. Also in this embodiment, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period are terminated in the game G53, which is 1000 games before.

When the AT state (ending) is terminated before the limiter, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b-2), the expected state is intervened after the final AT state is terminated. Instead, the privilege period ends in the AT state (ending). Since the privilege period is a period in which medals are reduced, the AT state (ending) is set after the last AT period, and the privilege period is comfortably ended without giving the player a feeling of loss in the vicinity of the limiter.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a setting suggestion effect executed after the AT state (ending) of the privilege period ends. As shown in FIG. 64A, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the third stop operation of the final game in the AT state (ending).

FIGS. 64 (b) and 64 (c) are diagrams showing a modified example of the execution time of the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment may be executed at the start of the AT state (ending) as shown in FIG. 64 (b), or may be executed at the start of the AT state (ending) as shown in FIG. 64 (c). It may be executed in the meantime.

<Other variants>
In the sixth embodiment, the number of games in the AT state (ending) is fixed at 10 games. However, apart from this, the number of games in the AT state (ending) may be variable. For example, the game may end when 10 games in which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state (ending) are exhausted. The establishment of the predetermined condition is, for example, a game in which the number of inserted medals (number of bets) in the AT state (ending) is three. That is, when the number of bets is one or two, it is not counted as the number of games for which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state (ending). In a game with one or two bets, the winning probability of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is set lower than in a game with three bets, and the operation navigation is executed even in the AT state. Since the probability is low and the specifications are disadvantageous in terms of ball output, it is intended that the disadvantaged game is not counted as the AT state (ending).

In this modified example, it is necessary to end the privilege period when 1000 games are consumed in the privilege period while considering that the game with one or two bets is played. Therefore, 1000 games It was decided to start the AT state (ending) when the value becomes a value before 990 (for example, 950) obtained by subtracting 10 games from.

FIG. 65A is a time chart showing the AT state (ending) of such a modified example. FIG. 65 (b) is a threshold value referred to by the privilege period counter that counts the count period c1, and FIG. 65 (c) is a threshold value referred to by the ending counter that counts the count period c2.

In this modification, when the value of the privilege period counter reaches the first threshold value of 950 in the AT state, the AT state (ending) is started. That is, the condition for shifting to the AT state (ending) is satisfied when 950 games are consumed during the privilege period.

In the AT state (ending), the ending counter operates, and when the value of the ending counter reaches the threshold value of 10, the AT state (ending) and the privilege period end. Here, the ending counter of this modification counts only the game of three bets in the AT state (ending). The privilege period counter of this modification counts the number of games in the privilege period regardless of the number of bets.

In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), the privilege period started from the 951st game of the privilege period ends at the 962th game. This means that there were two games in which the number of bets was not three between the 951st game and the 962nd game.

As described above, in this modification, since the ending counter does not count the games of one or two bets, the period of the AT state (ending) may be extended to 10 games or more. Therefore, in this modification, unlike the case of the sixth embodiment, the start time of the AT state (ending) is set to the 951st game of the privilege period.

However, it is not possible to extend the AT state (ending) period without limitation because it can be a hotbed for illegal games. Therefore, when the privilege period counter value reaches the second threshold value of 1000, the AT state is forcibly extended. (Ending) will be terminated and the privilege period will be terminated. That is, the value of the privilege period counter is updated even in the game of one or two bets.

As described in the sixth embodiment, in the AT state (ending), the story effect is executed for each game, but in the game with one or two bets, the effect is not advanced. There is. For example, in a game with one or two bets, the story effect of the game with the most recent bet number of three may be executed again, or the effect of the story game with the latest bet number of three may be executed again. May be left stopped. For example, when the effect A is executed in the third game (three-card game) in the AT state (ending), the effect A may be executed in the fourth game (two-card game).

[Other embodiments related to the fifth to sixth embodiments]
In the fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the number of games consumed during the privilege period is used as the limiter for the privilege period. However, the limiter of the privilege period is not limited to this. For example, the number of games consumed during the privilege period or the number of medals acquired during the privilege period may be set as the limiter. In the embodiment described below, the privilege period ends when 1000 games are consumed during the privilege period or when the cumulative number of medals (MY) obtained during the privilege period reaches 2000 or more.

Here, MY is a value counted by the MY counter, and when (1) the number of payouts> the number of inserts in the medal granting process of the game, the added value = the number of payouts-the number of inserts, and the MY counter While adding the added value to the value, (2) When the number of payouts ≤ the number of inserts, the subtraction value = the number of inserts − the number of payouts, and the subtraction value is subtracted from the value of the MY counter. As a result of the update, if the value of the MY counter is <0, the value of the MY counter is set to 0. That is, the value of the MY counter does not become negative.

In the embodiment described below, it is assumed that the same AT-type gaming state as in the fifth embodiment is provided. That is, it will be described as an embodiment in which the AT state (ending) does not exist. In addition, the image display of the game expected to be the final in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as the final expected game) will be described below. Here, the final expected game in the AT state has a MY value of 2000 in the game. Means a game that can be more than that. For example, at present, MY is 1995, and if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won in the game, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is won, the MY is 2003 by paying out 8 medals. It becomes a piece and reaches the limiter of the privilege period. However, if the small role 3 (Oshijun Bell) is not won, the MY remains 1995, and the limiter of the privilege period is not reached. The determination as to whether or not the game is the final expected game in the AT state is performed when the start lever of the game is operated, and is determined based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Then, in the final expected game in the AT state, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached, the game becomes the final game in the AT state.

<Production image of the final prediction game in AT state>
The production image of the final prediction game in the AT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the case where the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won and the final prediction game in the AT state is reached will be described. That is, the case where the operation navigation is executed in the final prediction game in the AT state will be described. Further, as shown in FIG. 66A, the start lever operation of the final prediction game in the AT state is the time point t61, the first stop operation time is the time point t62, the second stop operation time is the time point t63, and the third stop operation time. Is referred to as the time point t64 and thereafter.

FIG. 66B is a diagram illustrating a change in the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the final prediction game in the AT state. FIG. 66B shows a method of erasing the final game preview image d150 over time. The characters (AT game image) on the screen shown in FIGS. 66 and later mean that an image of the AT game such as a background image in the AT state is displayed.

The slot machine 100 simultaneously displays the final game preview image d150 and the operation navigation image d10 from the time point t61 based on the start lever operation of the final prediction game in the AT state. The slot machine 100 erases the final game preview image d150 after a predetermined time T1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the time point t61. Since the predetermined time T1 is set shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation, the final game preview image d150 is erased before the first stop operation. Will be done.

When the player performs the correct stop operation, the slot machine 100 erases the navigation image d10 of the corresponding stop operation according to each stop operation, and displays the AT end image d160 after the third stop operation.

The AT end image d160 is an effect image indispensable at the end of the AT state in order to display the fact that the AT state has ended and the degree of profit in the AT state (total number of payouts, etc.). However, if the AT end image d160 is suddenly displayed without displaying the final game preview image d150 at the start of the game, the player feels abrupt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the AT end image d160 is displayed after the final game preview image d150 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays all the navigation images d10 at the time of the incorrect answer stop operation (for example, FIG. 66B is a mistake in the first stop operation). to erase. Here, if an incorrect answer is operated in the final prediction game in the AT state, the limiter of the privilege period is not reached, so the AT end image d160 is not displayed, and the AT state continues in the next game.

In the next game, it is possible to perform the final game preview image d150 as in the previous game, but if it is determined that the number of medals paid out> the number of medals inserted in the next game, the cumulative number of medals won during the privilege period ( Since the number of MY) does not exceed 2000, the final game preview image d150 is not performed. Specifically, when the internal winning result after inserting three medals is the internal winning of a role with payout of three or more medals, the final game preview image d150 is performed, and the internal winning result after inserting three medals is obtained. , The final game notice image d150 is not performed when the winning combination is an out-of-game, a replaying combination, or a combination with less than 3 payouts. It is possible to prevent the player from being notified excessively frequently.

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a production image of a conventional final prediction game in an AT state. This is an effect image when the final game preview image d150 is displayed in the final prediction game in the AT state.

Conventionally, the final game preview image d150 is displayed during the period expected to be the final game. This is because the slot machine 100 has a plurality of operations in one game, and therefore, it is considered that the operation of the player may be affected depending on the timing of erasing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67, for example, when an incorrect stop operation is performed in the first stop operation, the display of the navigation image d10 is deleted after the first stop operation, but the display of the final game preview image d150 is continued. Was. The same applies even when an incorrect answer is performed in the second stop operation and the third stop operation. As a result, the AT state was continued while leaving the display indicating the final game, which made the player feel uncomfortable. Further, there is a possibility that the final game preview image d150 is continuously displayed in the next game.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the display of the final game preview image d150 is erased before the stop operation.

FIG. 68 is a diagram of another example for explaining the change of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the final prediction game in the AT state. FIG. 68 shows a method of erasing the final game preview image d150 due to a mistake in the stop operation.

FIG. 68A shows a case where an incorrect stop operation is performed in the first stop operation, and the slot machine 100 erases the display of the final game preview image d150 based on the first stop operation. .. On the other hand, FIG. 68B shows a case where an incorrect stop operation is performed in the second stop operation, and the slot machine 100 erases the display of the final game preview image d150 based on the second stop operation. ing. When the correct stop operation is performed, the display of the final game notice image d150 is deleted after the third stop operation.

In this example, since the final game preview image d150 and the operation navigation image d10 are deleted at the same time based on the incorrect answer stop operation, it is possible to grasp that the final game is no longer due to an operation error.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state. In this modification, the final game preview image d150 is not a character image, but an image of the entire screen whose color changes. More specifically, the final game preview image d150A is a color image that gradually darkens as the correct answer is stopped. When the game is started, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 1) before the first stop operation is performed, and when the first stop operation is performed, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 2), and the second When the stop operation is performed, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 3), and when the third stop operation is performed, the color of the screen changes darkly (change 4). Due to this change, the screen becomes dark in the order of change 1 <change 2 <change 3 <change 4. By gradually darkening the image, the AT background image is made difficult to see, and the end of the AT state is impressed. The final game preview image d150 may be a single color or an image in which a predetermined pattern is applied to the whole.

FIG. 69A shows a case where the correct stop operation is performed, and the final game preview image d150A is displayed as the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, and the stop operation progress. It gradually darkens, indicating that the AT end image d160 is displayed after the third stop operation.

FIG. 69B shows a case where an incorrect stop operation is performed. If the first stop operation is an operation error, the display of the final game preview image d150A is erased after the first stop operation, and the first stop operation is performed. 2 If the stop operation is an operation error, the display of the final game notice image d150A is erased after the second stop operation, and if the third stop operation is an operation error, the final game notice image after the third stop operation. The display of d150A indicates that it is erased.

In this way, the notice of the final game may be expressed by the color of the image instead of directly notifying the game by characters.

The color of the entire screen does not have to be changed. For example, the display area of the image suggesting the end may be enlarged each time the operation is performed. The player may be made aware that the end is approaching with the operation. Further, the color of the entire screen does not have to be changed. For example, the color may be changed only in the main screen area where the image changes as the game progresses. The player may be made aware that the end is approaching with the operation.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state. In the modified example shown in FIG. 70A, the final game preview image d150B is started to be displayed before the operation navigation image d10, and the final game preview image d150B is gradually enlarged and displayed. As a result, the final game preview image d150B can be made to stand out.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 70B, the final game preview image d150C is displayed larger than the operation navigation image d10, and the final game preview image d150C and the operation navigation image d10 are displayed in an overlapping manner. This makes it easier for the player who pays attention to the operation navigation to notice that the final game is in the AT state.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 70 (c), the final game preview image d150D is gradually enlarged and displayed, displayed on the entire screen, and then erased. During the enlarged display, the final game preview image d150D is displayed so as to overlap the operation navigation image d10. The final game preview image d150D is displayed at a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the time T2 (for example, 0.8 seconds) from the start lever operation to the activation of the first stop operation. As a result, even if the operation navigation image d10 is displayed so as to hinder the visibility, the player who pays attention to the operation navigation is the final game in the AT state without inducing a mistake in the stop operation of the player. It becomes easier to notice.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state.

Specifically, FIG. 71 shows that when a stop operation error is made in the final prediction game in the AT state and the limiter of the privilege period is not reached, the game starts in the next game of the game regardless of the result of the winning combination internal winning process. The case where the final game notice image d150 is started to be displayed again from the time t61 of the lever operation is shown.

In this case, for example, the final game preview image d150 is displayed even if the limiter of the privilege period is not reached due to an internal winning of the re-game combination or a loss in the next game. As a result, since the final game preview image d150 is displayed many times over a plurality of games, the player can grasp that he / she is in the vicinity of the final game in the AT state.

Here, the second and subsequent final game notice images d150 may have the same display mode as the first final game notice image d150, or may have different display modes. In the latter case, for example, the second and subsequent final game preview images d150 may be displayed smaller than the first final game preview image d150. By displaying the final game preview image d150 for the second and subsequent times inconspicuously, other production images become more conspicuous, so that mistakes in the stop operation can be reduced.

The small display is an example of an inconspicuous display. For example, the display image may be reduced in density and the display portion may be moved to a corner portion to make the display inconspicuous. Further, in the latter case, for example, the second and subsequent final game notice images d150 may be displayed larger than the first final game notice image d150. By displaying the final game preview image d150 for the second and subsequent times in a conspicuous manner, it is possible to grasp that the player is in the vicinity of the final game in the AT state. The large display is an example of a conspicuous display. For example, the display may be made conspicuous by increasing the density of the display image or moving the display portion to the center.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect image in the final prediction game in the AT state.
Specifically, unlike FIG. 71, FIG. 72 shows the final game notice after the next game of the game when the limiter of the privilege period is not reached due to a mistake in the stop operation in the final prediction game in the AT state. The case where the image d150 is not displayed is shown. By displaying the final game preview image d150 once, the player determines that it has been recognized.

In this case, for example, the final game preview image d150 is not displayed regardless of whether the limiter of the privilege period is reached or not reached as a result of the winning combination internal lottery in the next game.

The final game preview image d150 of the modified example shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 shows a case where the final game preview image d150 is erased after a predetermined time T1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the time point t61.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 69, when the correct answer stop operation is performed, the display of the final game notice image d150 is continued, and when the incorrect answer stop operation is performed, the final game notice image d150 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the display of the final game preview image d150 may be continued even when the incorrect answer is stopped.

Of course, in the case of an incorrect stop operation, the AT end image d160 is not displayed after the third stop operation. Further, in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation, the AT state continues, so that the AT end image d160 is deleted based on the medal insertion operation of the next game. That is, in the final prediction game in the AT state, the display of the final game preview image d150 may be continued until the limiter is reached and the AT end image d160 is displayed, regardless of the content of the stop operation. ..

In this way, there is a final game advance notice effect in which the effect mode changes according to the operation, and if there is no operation error during the final game advance notice effect, the AT end image is displayed after the third stop operation, while the final game is said. If there is an operation error during the advance notice effect, the AT end image may not be displayed and the display of the final game advance notice effect may be continued after the next game. Even if you do not notice that there was an operation error during operation, you can notice the operation error depending on the presence or absence of the AT end image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the final game preview image d150 is displayed in the game expected to be the final game in the AT state, that is, the last one game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final game preview image is displayed over a plurality of games. The d170 may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, the final game preview image d170 may be displayed over the last three games. The final game preview image d170 in this case is an image that displays the number of remaining games as the game progresses. For example, it is displayed as "last 3G" at the time of the remaining 3 games, "last 2G" at the time of the remaining 2 games, and "last 1G" at the time of the remaining 1 game.

The determination of the last 3 games is determined from the value of the MY counter. For example, the final game preview image d170 may be started to be displayed when the value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined threshold value close to the limiter (for example, 1800).

FIG. 74A shows a case where the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation, the display of the final game preview image d150 is started, and then the AT state is ended in three games. In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the AT state is terminated with the result that the game G71 wins a small win 3b, the game G72 loses, and the game G73 wins a small win 3b. That is, in this modified example, after the final game preview image d150 is started, the AT state is ended in 3 games regardless of the number of medals acquired in the last 3 games.

On the other hand, FIG. 74B shows a case where the AT state is not ended in 3 games after the final game preview image d150 is started to be displayed by performing the stop operation not following the operation navigation. In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), since the small winning combination 3b was not won by performing a stop operation not following the operation navigation in the game G71, the display of the number of remaining games in the final game preview image d150 of the next game changed. Not. Similarly, in the game G73 as well, since the small winning combination 3b was not won by performing a stop operation not following the operation navigation, the display of the number of remaining games in the final game preview image d150 of the next game has not changed. As described above, in this modification, the number of remaining games of the final game preview image d150 of the next game is not changed for the game in which the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation, and the final game preview image d150 of the previous game is used as it is. I am trying to display it. That is, in this modified example, after the final game preview image d150 is started, the game that has been stopped according to the operation navigation is not targeted for the remaining games in the AT state, and the AT state is extended by that game. ing.

After starting the final game preview image d150, a game that has been stopped according to the operation navigation may be targeted for the remaining games in the AT state, and that game may be included in the number of remaining games. Since the player is looking at the final game preview image d150, it may be possible to end the AT state without discomfort by ending it early. Further, in this case, in the game before starting the final game preview image d150, the game in which the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation is not targeted for the remaining games in the AT state, and after the final game preview image d150 is started. In the above game, it is preferable to target the remaining games in the AT state only for the games in which the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation.

It should be noted that the game state of the AT system of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74 does not include the AT state (ending). However, it may be configured to include an AT state (ending). In this case, the AT state (ending) is performed in the case where 1000 games are consumed in the privilege period and the case where the cumulative number of medals acquired (MY) in the privilege period is 2000 or more, and in the AT state (ending). The ending production shall be performed. The ending effect is different from the ending effect performed when 1000 games are exhausted in the privilege period and the ending effect performed when the cumulative number of medals acquired (MY) in the privilege period is 2000 or more. It is easy to recognize in which case the ending effect is performed. Further, when one ending effect is performed, it is preferable to continue one effect without starting the other ending effect even if the start condition of the other ending effect is satisfied. The ending effect being executed can be shown to the player until the end.

Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74, a condition regarding MY is added as a limiter for the privilege period. However, conditions other than MY may be used. For example, a condition may be added as a limiter, which ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number, and ends when the number of winnings of a predetermined combination reaches a predetermined number.

Further, the period of the AT state may be either a fixed period (for example, 50 games) or a variable period (for example, an AT state of 50 games plus an additional AT game of 20 games). In the fixed AT state period, or in the case of the variable AT state, in the initial AT state period, when comparing the first AT state of the privilege period and the second and subsequent AT states, the first AT state is better. The period may be longer than the AT state after the second time. Even in the AT state, it may not be possible to give a bad impression that many medals cannot be won.

Further, based on the result of the game progress in the AT state, the expectation degree of the next expected state (expected degree of transition to the AT state) to be started after the end of the AT state may be determined. For example, a lottery process may be performed for each game in the AT state to determine the degree of expectation in the expected state. As the period of the AT state becomes longer, the degree of expectation of the next expected state can be increased. According to this configuration, when the first AT state is longer than the second and subsequent AT states, by starting the first AT game, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for the execution of the second and subsequent AT games. If it is possible to make a change that lengthens the period during the AT state, it may be expected that the AT game will be executed next time if there is even one change that lengthens the period.

Further, the AT state may be divided into a plurality of parts (parts). For example, the AT state may be divided into a first half part and a second half part. In this case, the first half portion may be a period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 5 games are fixed), and in the first half portion, the first half portion effect that can be grasped as the first half portion of the AT state may be executed. .. On the other hand, in the latter half, the number of games is variable (for example, variable in 5 games or more), and in the first half, the latter half effect that can be grasped as the latter half of the AT state is executed. Good. This makes it easy to grasp the progress until the end of the AT state. In addition, the first half gives a sense of security that the game will continue, and the second half gives a sense of expectation that the game will continue for a long time, giving a different impression in one state.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half portion and the second half portion, it is preferable that the period of the first half portion is shorter than the period of the second half portion. In this case, the expectation that the game will continue for a long time may be further increased. On the other hand, on the contrary, the period of the first half may be longer than the period of the second half. In this case, the sense of security that the game continues may be further enhanced.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half portion and the second half portion, the first half portion production may be a continuous story production. For example, in the first half of the first AT state of the privilege period, the first episode of the story production is executed, and in the first half of the second AT state of the privilege period, the second episode of the story production is executed. In the first half of the third AT state, the third episode of the story production may be executed. That is, the story production may be executed according to the number of times the AT state is executed during the privilege period. When the final story of the story production is executed, it is preferable that the privilege period ends and the normal period starts with the AT game. According to this, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the privilege period.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half part and the second half part, regarding the period of the first half part of the AT state, the period of the first half part of the first AT state in the privilege period is the first half of the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. It is preferable that the period is longer than the partial period. In this case, it may be possible to give the impression that many medals can be obtained if the AT state can be started. On the other hand, the period of the first half of the first AT state in the privilege period may be shorter than the period of the second and subsequent AT states in the privilege period. In this case, it may be possible to give the impression that many medals can be obtained if the AT state after the second time can be started.

Further, when the AT state is divided into the first half portion and the second half portion, the latter half portion of the AT state may be further divided into the first half portion and the second half portion. In this case, the first half of the second half of the AT state is a period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 10 games are fixed), and the first half of the second half can be grasped as the first half of the second half of the AT state. The second half part and the first half part may be performed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latter half of the AT state, the number of games is a variable period (for example, it is variable in 0 games or more), and in the latter half of the latter half, it is possible to grasp that it is the latter half of the latter half. The second half of the partial production may be executed. When the number of games is variable, at least one of the plurality of types of variable games is set to a period (for example, 20 games) that exceeds the period of the first half of the latter half (for example, fixed at 10 games). May be good. It may be possible to raise the expectations of the player.

Further, regarding the period of the expected state, the length of the period of the expected state may be determined without depending on the length of the period of the immediately preceding AT state. For example, if 10 games are uniformly determined at the start of the expected state and then the condition for extending the period is satisfied, the period of the expected state may be extended regardless of the length of the period of the immediately preceding AT state. .. It becomes easier to predict how much the medals obtained in the last AT state will decrease.

<< Embodiment to execute premier ending production >>
The seventh embodiment is an embodiment in which a new playability is realized by devising the ending effect.

There is a game console that executes an ending effect in the AT state (for example, JP-A-2019-068509).

However, there is still room for improvement in the ending production.

The game console of the present embodiment is a game console capable of providing a novel ending effect that has never existed before.

[7th Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment is similar to the sixth embodiment, and the configuration of the game state of the AT system is the same as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 58, the AT system gaming state of the present embodiment includes the AT state (ending). However, in the present embodiment, the AT game number correction process is not executed. Therefore, in the AT state (ending) of the present embodiment, the number of digested games in the privilege period does not end before reaching 1000 games. That is, the AT state (ending) of the present embodiment is a fixed period from the 991th game to the 1000th game of the privilege period.

More specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the privilege period counter counts the number of games from the start of the privilege period, and when the value of the privilege period counter reaches 990, the AT state (ending) is started from the next game, and the AT state (ending) is started. When the value of the privilege period counter reaches 1000, the privilege period ends together with the AT state (ending) in the game.

Further, as a premise, in the AT state of the present embodiment, the number of AT games may be added based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. On the other hand, in the AT state (ending), the number of AT games is not added.

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming state of the effect system of the first sub-control unit 400 is referred to as an effect state. Hereinafter, the configurations, functions and processes different from those of the sixth embodiment will be mainly described, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Premium ending production>
The premium ending effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79.

The premium ending effect is an ending effect that is executed before the number of digested games in the privilege period is 990 games. The premium ending effect is a kind of ending effect, but it is different from the ending effect (hereinafter referred to as the normal ending effect) executed in the 991th to 1000th games of the privilege period (the effect will be described later). It is a production of. The premium ending effect of the present embodiment is started before the AT state (ending) is started, and is started when the additional special zone is started in the AT state near the AT state (ending), and the AT state is changed. It will be executed until it continues.

Here, before the AT state (ending) is started, the vicinity of the AT state (ending) specifically means that the number of digested games during the privilege period is 960 games (hereinafter, also referred to as a threshold value) or more. .. Further, the additional special zone is a fixed period of 5 games, and refers to a period in which the probability of winning the AT additional lottery is higher than in the normal AT state. In addition, the additional special zone is determined when the number of AT additional games to be determined is larger than the normal AT state, or when the probability of winning the AT additional lottery is higher than the normal AT state and the lottery is won. The number of games added to the AT may be larger than the normal AT state. In this extra special zone, the AT state is maintained for 5 games regardless of the number of remaining AT games. The AT addition lottery is executed every game in these five games when the start lever is operated, and when the AT addition lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT addition games is given. In other words, it can be said that the additional special zone is a period in which it is easy to acquire the number of AT additional games.

In addition, the addition specialized zone means a zone specialized for addition. It is a zone where many additions that are unlikely to occur in a normal AT state can occur. For example, when the number of times the operation navigation is executed is set as the end condition of the AT state, a large number of additional times that are unlikely to occur in the normal AT state can occur with respect to the number of times the operation navigation is executed as the end condition. Is.

The additional special zone is started when the additional special zone lottery executed every game in the AT state is won. Therefore, when the additional special zone lottery is won in the game in which the number of digested games in the privilege period is 960 or more and the additional special zone is started, the premium ending effect is executed.

For example, the extra special zone may be started when the extra special zone lottery, which is executed when the predetermined small winning combination is internally won, is won, or is acquired as the game progresses. It may be started when the additional special zone lottery executed when the points reach a predetermined value is won.

FIG. 75 (a) shows the transition of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 when the additional special zone is started in the AT state of the 970th game during the privilege period. It is a time chart which shows.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the additional special zone started from the 970th game of the privilege period, the number of AT additional games is given, and the AT state continues until at least the 991th game or later of the specific period. Shown. In this case, since the AT state (ending) is started from the 991th game of the specific period, the AT state is guaranteed up to the 1000th game of the specific period.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75A, when the additional special zone is started, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the AT effect state (premium ending) in order to execute the premium ending effect. become. However, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 remains the AT state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 is not involved in the premium ending effect (the game state of the AT system remains the AT state, and the AT state (ending) is not set). The first sub-control unit 400 is only involved in the execution control of the premium ending effect. In the additional special zone period, processing related to the additional special zone is performed, and in the normal AT state period from the period of the additional special zone to the AT state (ending) period, processing related to the normal AT state is performed, and AT During the state (ending) period, processing related to the AT state (ending) is performed. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not have a processing load related to the execution control of the premium ending effect.

For example, it is not necessary to perform a process of changing the AT state (ending) period (a process of changing 10 games set as a fixed period to another number of games) with the execution of the premium ending effect. Also, for example, if the AT state (ending) is set, up to 1000 games will be completed, but even if the number of additions in the additional special zone is small, up to 1000 games will be completed, so a process to correct this. If you include, the processing load will increase.

FIG. 75 (b) is a time chart that accurately shows the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 in the vicinity of the game in which the additional special zone is started in the example shown in FIG. 75 (a).

When the additional special zone is started from the 970th game of the privilege period to 5 games, the AT production state (premium ending) is started from the game Gn after the 970th game. That is, the premium ending effect does not start from the 970th game, but starts from the game Gn. Specifically, in the winning production state one game after the 970th game, the additional special zone production indicating the winning of the additional special zone is executed for two games, and then the AT production state (premium ending) is started. There is. In this way, the additional special zone is designed to improve the interest of the player by performing various effects.

That is, the AT production state (premium ending) is performed not in the entire period of the additional special zone but in a part of the period, and is continuously executed in the subsequent period. In addition, the AT production state (premium ending) may be executed after the additional special zone production indicating the winning of the additional special zone is executed for 5 or more games. In this case, the AT effect state (premium ending) is not performed during the period of the additional special zone, but is executed during the subsequent period. It is possible to fully perform the production that excites the winning of the additional special zone.

FIG. 76A is a table showing the types of ending effects of the present embodiment. The effects 1 and 2 are the ending effect when the additional specialized zone is not set, that is, the normal ending effect, and the effects 3, 4 and 5 are the ending effect when the additional specialized zone is set, that is, the premium ending effect. Is. As described above, a plurality of types of ending effects of the present embodiment are prepared, and a plurality of types are also prepared for the premium ending effects. As the premium ending effect, the premium ending effect selected by the premium ending selection lottery executed when the additional special zone lottery is won is set.

FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram comparing one playback time (effect scale) of the normal ending effect and the premium ending effect. In the present embodiment, the normal ending effect displays the ending image d190, which is a movie image of about 20 seconds, on the effect image display device 157, and the premium ending effect produces the premium ending image d200, which is a movie image of about 40 seconds. It is displayed on the image display device 157. The premium ending effect is an effect that is executed for more than 10 games, and is a rare effect that is executed less frequently than the normal ending effect. Therefore, one playback time is long and the player is bored. It is a production that does not let you. Note that, in FIG. 76 (b), one playback time of the movie image of the premium ending effect has been described, but the sound and the lamp are not limited to this. The one playback time may be the same time as the above-mentioned effect scale, or may be a short time. In the case of a short time, it will be executed repeatedly.

FIG. 76 (c) is a table schematically showing lottery data of the AT additional lottery executed in the additional special zone. In the AT addition lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the number of additional games is 0 (that is, lost) with a probability of 1/10, and the number of additional games is 3, 2 / with a probability of 3/10. The number of additional games is 6 with a probability of 10, the number of additional games is 8 with a probability of 2/10, and the number of additional games is 10 with a probability of 2/10. As a result, the expected value of the number of additional games when 5 games in the additional special zone are exhausted is about 30 games (5.7 × 5 = 28.5 games). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of digested games 960 in the privilege period is set as a threshold value, and when this additional special zone is given in games exceeding this threshold value, the AT state is the AT state of the 991th game in the privilege period. It is designed to be extended to the start of (Ending) and to increase the probability of completing 1000 games during the privilege period.

In the additional special zone of this embodiment, it is recommended to bet three cards and to push forward. Therefore, in the additional special zone, the AT additional lottery is not executed when a stop operation other than a three-card bet or a forward push is performed. That is, when the game is played with a bet number different from the recommended number of three bets, the expectation that an additional bet can be obtained is lower than in the normal AT state.

77 (a) and 77 (b) show the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 and the effect of the first sub control unit 400 when the additional special zone is started in the AT state of the 970th game during the privilege period. It is a time chart showing the transition of the state. Specifically, in FIG. 77 (a), as a result of the number of AT additional games being given in the additional special zone, the AT game was extended to the 995th game, and as a result, the AT game could be completed up to 1000 games. Shows the case. On the other hand, in FIG. 77 (b), as a result of the number of AT additional games being given in the additional special zone, the AT game was extended only to the 985th game, and as a result, the AT state ended in the 985 games of the privilege period. It shows the case of. In the case of FIG. 77 (b), after the AT state is terminated, the normal state is entered (see paragraph [0480]). In the present embodiment, when the AT state is terminated in a game having a threshold value (the number of digested games in the privilege period is 960 games) or more, the game shifts to the normal state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the additional special zone is set and the premium ending effect is started to be executed, the premium ending effect cannot always be executed up to the 1000th game of the privilege period, and the premium ending effect is not always executed. There are also cases where it ends just before your eyes.

When the premium ending effect reaches the 1000th game, the effect image display device 157 displays the number of acquisitions, etc. by the end effect of the privilege period, but when the privilege period ends before the 990 game in this way. Also, the end effect of the privilege period is performed in the same manner as when the 1000th game is reached. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the process has ended without executing the AT state (ending). In addition, the number of AT games remaining before the start of the special zone for addition is added to the number of AT games obtained in the special zone for addition, and the game is completed, which makes the player feel lost. Never.

FIG. 78A shows an effect mode of the premium ending effect. In the premium ending effect of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78A, the premium ending image d200 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In the premium ending image d200, the number of acquired games d201 in the AT state is displayed, but in principle, the number of remaining games in the AT state is not displayed. In addition, the number of AT additional games is not displayed. This is because even if the premium ending effect is executed, the AT state may not always be able to complete 1000 games during the privilege period. As a result, since it is not known how long the AT state will continue, the player can face the premium ending production with a sense of tension in each game.

FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the last 5 games of the premium ending effect. As described above, in the premium ending effect of the present embodiment, in principle, the number of remaining games in the AT state is not displayed, but when the last 5 games (the number of remaining games in the AT state is 5 games), the number of acquired games d201 and the AT state are displayed. The number of remaining games d202 is displayed. This is to clearly notify the player of the end time of the AT state.

If the last 5 games are won in the AT addition lottery, the number of AT addition games is given, and the number of remaining games in the AT state exceeds 5 games, the display of the number of remaining games d202 in the AT state ends. ..

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the additional special zone effect. The additional special zone effect is an effect indicating that the player has shifted to the additional special zone where the number of AT additional games is likely to be given.

In FIG. 79 (a), when the additional special zone lottery is won in the game in which the number of digested games in the privilege period is 960 or more, the premium ending effect is executed, and in the game in which the number of digested games in the privilege period is less than 960. If the extra special zone lottery is won, it indicates that the extra special zone effect is executed. That is, the additional special zone effect is an effect that is executed when the additional special zone lottery is won in a game far away from the limiter, not near the limiter during the privilege period.

Although the threshold value is 960 games, any index may be used as long as it is an index near the limiter of the privilege period. For example, the total number of medals won in the AT state or the execution time in the AT state may be used as the threshold value. It is not necessary to set the threshold value. If you win the extra special zone lottery during the privilege period, a premium ending effect will be executed. It can give the impression that you can get the benefits of the extra special zone and the premium ending production.

FIG. 79B is a time chart showing the transition of the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 when the additional special zone is started in the AT state of the 300th game of the privilege period. Also in this case, the additional special zone for a fixed period from the 300th game to the 5th game is started, and the additional special zone effect is executed in the additional special zone effect state. In addition, unlike the premium ending production, the additional special zone production is a production of one game and is not executed over a plurality of games. By directing the appearance that the number of extras is decided for each game, the extra winning is expected for each game. In this case, even if the additional special zone is finished, there are still the number of games remaining in the AT state. Therefore, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the AT effect state after the additional special zone effect state is finished. .. Of course, although not shown, if there is no remaining number of games in the AT state after the addition special zone is finished, the normal production state is started (see FIG. 77 (b)).

FIG. 79 (c) shows the transition of the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 when the additional special zone is started in the AT state of the 300th game of the privilege period and then the 1000 games of the privilege period are completed. It is a time chart. In this way, even if the additional special zone is started from the number of digested games that is less than the threshold of the privilege period (specifically, 960), if the number of AT additional games given is large, the AT production state is 990 games. It may be possible to continue until and complete the privilege period.

In the AT state (ending) of the seventh embodiment, the specification is such that the number of AT games is not added, but the number of AT games may be added in the AT state (ending). Further, an effect of adding the number of AT games may be executed. The player can know the number of AT games left when the limiter is reached. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of additional games is given in the AT additional lottery (see FIG. 76 (c)), but the number of sets (for example, 50 games per set) is added. It may be. Further, instead of the number of games, the number of operation navigations when the push order bell (small role 3) is internally won may be used.

<Direction control processing>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 80 is a process corresponding to the effect control process of step S3005 in FIG. 18A.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not to start the additional special zone. Specifically, whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 starts the additional special zone based on the content of the additional special zone lottery command indicating the result of the additional special zone lottery transmitted from the main control unit 300. Is determined. If the additional special zone is started, the process proceeds to step S3502, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3505.

In step S3502, it is determined whether or not the number of digested games in the privilege period is equal to or greater than the threshold value (specifically, 960). If the number of digested games in the privilege period is equal to or greater than the threshold value (specifically, 960), the process proceeds to step S3503, and if the number of digested games in the privilege period is less than the threshold value (specifically, 960), the step is performed. Proceed to S3504.

In step S3503, since the additional special zone lottery was won in the game in which the number of digested games in the privilege period is equal to or more than the threshold value (specifically, 960), the premium ending effect is set. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the premium ending effect (see FIG. 78). After the process of step S3503, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3504, since the additional special zone lottery was won in the game in which the number of digested games in the privilege period is less than the threshold value (specifically, 960), the additional special zone effect is set. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the additional special zone effect. After the process of step S3504, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3505, it is determined whether or not the update information in the AT state has been received. The update information in the AT state is, for example, the number of medals inserted or paid out, the number of games in the AT state, and the like. The acquired number d201 in the AT state displayed in the premium ending effect is updated based on this update information. If the update information in the AT state is received, the process proceeds to step S3506, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3506, it is determined whether or not the AT state ends. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the AT state ends based on the number of games remaining in the AT state. If the AT state ends, the process proceeds to step S3507, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3508. In this embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 counts the number of games in the AT state. Of course, apart from this, it may be determined whether or not the AT state ends based on the game state command transmitted from the main control unit 300.

In step S3507, an AT end effect indicating that the AT state has ended is set. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute the AT end effect. In the AT end effect, a character indicating the end and the total number of acquired AT states are displayed. After the process of step S3507, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3508, the effect that reflects the updated information is set. For example, the number of the acquired number d201 of the premium ending effect is updated. After the process of step S3508, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3509, other effect control processing is executed.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the fixed period of the additional special zone is set to 5 games. However, the fixed period of the additional special zone is not limited to 5 games. For example, it may be a variable period, or as shown in FIG. 81 (a), it may be an additional special zone that continues until the 990th game of the privilege period.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 from the 991th game to the 1000th game of the privilege period is set to the AT state (ending). However, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the AT state (ending) may not be provided. That is, the 991th to 1000th games of the privilege period are in the AT state. Of course, even in such a modified example, the ending effect is executed in the 991th to 1000th games of the privilege period. In this case, the 991th to 1000th games of the privilege period do not have a fixed period of 10 games. Therefore, for example, if the game ends at the 995th game of the privilege period, the ending effect being executed ends halfway. However, by setting the ending effect for each game, it is possible to achieve a natural effect.

Note that FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) show a case where the additional special zone is set from the 970th game to the 990th game of the privilege period, and the premium ending effect is executed in the additional special zone. Assuming that the extra special zone always continues until the 990 games that start the AT state (ending), even if the extra number cannot be obtained in all the games up to the 990 games, the 990th game Since it reaches, it becomes possible to play up to 1000 games. If the privilege period did not continue until 990 games and the privilege period ended before 990 games, the impression that the execution period of the premium ending effect was short (AT state (ending) was not executed). However, since the premium ending effect is executed until 1000 games are reached, it does not give the impression that it was a short period of time.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ending effect has been described as an example of the effect indicating a specific state, but the effect indicating the specific state is not limited to the ending effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), it may be applied when a special effect is executed during the guaranteed period of the AT state. Here, the commitment period is a fixed period of 10 games in which the AT state is guaranteed, and as shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the 101st to 110th games of the privilege period, the privilege period. The period from the 201st game to the 210th game, ..., 100N (N is an integer of 1 to 9) + 1st game to the 100N + 10th game. During such a privilege period, the special effect shown in FIG. 82 (c) is executed. For example, different types of special effects are executed in each commitment period, such as production 1 in the 101st to 110th games of the privilege period and production 2 in the 201st to 210th games of the privilege period.

Under such a configuration, an additional special zone for 5 games may be provided, and a special effect may be executed in the additional special zone. That is, the special effect executed during the commitment period may be executed ahead of schedule in the additional special zone.

Since the special production is executed at a timing different from the scheduled timing, it is possible to provide a more tense and interesting game.

<< Embodiment in which points are given in a normal state >>
The eighth embodiment is an embodiment in which new playability is realized by devising the point awarding in the normal state.

There is a game table that gives points based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and provides a game result according to the given points (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-191847).

However, there is still room for improvement in granting points in the normal state.

The game console of the present embodiment is a game console that can provide novel points that have never been given before. In other words, it is a game table that provides an unprecedented AT game based on the point grant in the normal state.

[8th Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment has the same configuration of the AT system gaming state as the fifth embodiment. The eighth embodiment is characterized by a normal state in the AT-based gaming state shown in FIG. 34.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the normal state will be described in detail, and the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals with respect to other configurations, functions, and processes, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the eighth embodiment, the gaming state of the effect system of the first sub-control unit 400 is referred to as an effect state.

<Normal state>
FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a normal state of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83A, the normal state of the present embodiment includes a normal period and a battle zone. More specifically, the normal period includes a normal period 1, a normal period 2, and a normal period 3, as shown in FIG. 83 (b). As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the points acquired in the normal period are reflected in the production result of the battle zone. In addition, since the production result of the battle zone suggests whether or not it is possible to shift to the expected state (CZ), the points acquired in the normal period are indicators related to whether or not it is possible to shift to the expected state (CZ). Is.

The basic route from the normal state to the AT state is a route from the normal period to the battle zone, from the battle zone to the expected state (CZ), and from the expected state (CZ) to the AT state. In addition, as rare routes, a route that changes from the normal period to the AT state, a route that changes from the normal period to the expected state (CZ), a route that changes from the expected state (CZ) to the AT state, a route that changes from the normal period to the battle zone, and a battle zone to the AT state. There is a route that becomes, but the opportunity to become this route is extremely small, and the frequency of occurrence is about once every 2 to 3 days.

The normal period 1 is a period set in the normal state after the privilege period ends. The normal period 2 is a fixed period (10 games in the present embodiment) set when the normal period 1 in the normal state ends. The normal period 3 is a period set when the normal period 2 in the normal state ends. Then, when the normal period 3 in the normal state ends, the battle zone is set.

In the normal period 2, the fixed period (10 games) may be set twice in succession (20 games in total), and one game number may be selected from 10 games, 20 games, or 30 games. It may be set by The longer the period, the more satisfying the player is. Therefore, if the possibility of 10 games or more is included, the motivation to play in the normal period 2 can be increased. However, the number of games should be 10 games, which is generally fixed. This is because the purpose is to make it easier for the player to predict the game result and to make it easier to perform the games of the normal period 1 and the normal period 2.

The battle zone is a period during which the battle effect over 5 games is executed, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the expected state (CZ) based on the result of the battle effect. Specifically, (1) when the main character defeats the enemy character in the battle production, it shifts to the expected state (CZ), and (2) when the main character loses to the enemy character in the battle production, Shift to normal period 3 (maintain normal state). In the example shown in FIG. 83 (a), the battle effect of the battle zone of the period T1 shows the case where the main character is defeated, and the normal period is started from the next game. On the other hand, the battle production in the battle zone of the period T2 shows the case where the main character wins, and the expected state (CZ) is started from the next game.

In the normal period of this embodiment, a point lottery is executed every game. FIG. 83 (c) is a diagram showing the probability of winning the point lottery in each normal period (referred to as the point winning probability). In the present embodiment, the point winning probability X of the normal period 1 <the point winning probability Z of the normal period 3 <the point winning probability Y of the normal period 2 is set, and the point winning probability X = 0. That is, the normal period 1 is a disadvantageous section in which points are not awarded because the point lottery is not won.

In the present embodiment, the point lottery is executed in each game during the period excluding the battle zone in the normal state, and the battle zone gives a result according to the points acquired in the previous period. It is assumed that the point lottery is executed in each game during the period including the battle zone of the state, and the battle zone may give a result including the points obtained during the battle zone. It is possible to give the player an impression that there is no loss.

FIG. 84A is a table showing the probability of winning points during the normal period. The winning probability Y in the normal period 2 is 1/1, and the winning probability is 100%. That is, the normal period 2 is a zone in which points increase, which is an advantageous period. Further, since the winning probability Z in the normal period 3 is 1/10, it is a period in which points increase, but it is a more disadvantageous period than the normal period 2. Since the winning probability X of the normal period 1 is 0, the normal period 1 is a period in which points do not increase.

FIG. 84 (b) is a table showing points given when winning as a result of the point lottery in the normal period 2. In the point value lottery of the normal period 2, 1 point is given with a probability of 80/100, 2 points with a probability of 10/100, and 3 points with a probability of 10/100. That is, the expected point value in one game in the normal period 2 is 1.3.

FIG. 84 (c) is a table showing points given when winning as a result of the point lottery in the normal period 3. In the point value lottery for the normal period 3, 1 point is given with a probability of 98/100, 2 points with a probability of 1/100, and 3 points with a probability of 1/100. That is, the expected point value in one game in the normal period 3 is 0.1 (= 1.01 × 1/10).

As described above, in the normal state of the present embodiment, the disadvantageous normal period 1 is first set, the most advantageous normal period 2 is set, and finally the slightly advantageous normal period 3 is set. (The reason will be described later).

In the present embodiment, the point winning probability X = 0 in the normal period 1 is set, but the point winning rate probability X = 0 does not have to be. For example, the expected point value in one game in the normal period 1 may be less than the expected point value in one game in the normal period 3. For example, if the expected point value in one game in the normal period 3 is 0.1, the expected point value in one game in the normal period 1 is set to 0.01 or the like. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play in the normal period 1.

85 (a) and 85 (b) are diagrams for explaining the normal state of the main control unit 300 of the present embodiment in association with the effect state of the first sub control unit 400. Hereinafter, the effect state corresponding to the normal period 1 is the "normal 1 effect state", the effect state corresponding to the normal period 2 is the "normal 2 effect state", and the effect state corresponding to the normal period 3 is the "normal 3 effect state". The production state corresponding to the battle zone is referred to as "battle production state".

To be precise, the normal period 3 of the present embodiment may shift to the normal period 4, as shown in FIG. 84 (b). That is, there is a case where the normal period 3 is changed to the normal period 4 of the fixed period, the fixed period is ended, and then the normal period 3 is returned again. Here, the normal period 4 is a period similar to the normal period 2, and as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the winning rate of the normal period 4 is 1/2. The points given when the point lottery is won in the normal period 4 are the same as those in FIG. 84 (b). That is, the expected point value in one game in the normal period 4 is 0.65 (= 1.3 × 1/2). The normal period 4 is a zone in which points increase second in the normal state, and is an advantageous period.

As described above, in the normal period 3 of the present embodiment, the winning rate Z <winning rate Y, but since the normal period 4 may be set in the normal period 3, this gives the player a game. Motivates to continue. Furthermore, since it is expected that the same number of points as the number of points acquired in the normal period 2 can be obtained, the motivation to continue the game in the normal state after starting the normal period 4 until the end of the normal period 4 is completed. Is giving.

FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the normal period 1 in detail. The normal period 1 in the normal state starts when the privilege period ends, and ends when the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. FIG. 86A is a time chart showing in detail the timing of the end of the normal period 1.

Specifically, the normal period 1 of the present embodiment is updated to the normal period 2 in the game state control process (time point STA3) of the game in which the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is internally won. On the other hand, the normal 1 effect state is updated to the normal 2 effect state in the medal insertion process (time BET4) of the next game of the game internally won in the replay 1 (normal replay). As described above, the timing of updating the gaming state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 are different.

Here, in the normal game state 1 (RT1) of the present embodiment, the probability of internally winning the re-game combination 1 (normal replay) is about 1/6 (not shown), so that the average game of the normal period 1 The number is 6 games. That is, in the present embodiment, after digesting the disadvantageous normal period 1 of about 6 games, the game shifts to the advantageous normal period 2. The normal period 1 may be a fixed period (between 6 games).

FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the normal period 1 effect executed in the normal period 1. In the normal period 1 effect, the background image d310 indicating that the normal period 1 is set and the number of games d311 in the normal period 1 are displayed on the effect image display device 157. In addition, since points are not given in the normal period 1, the number of points is not displayed in the normal period 1 production.

Since the normal period 1 is a disadvantageous period, it is conceivable to start from the normal period 2 after the privilege period ends. However, in the case of this specification, since there is no disadvantageous period, the point increase rate cannot be set as high as the normal period 2 of the present embodiment. If the point increase rate is set high, it is difficult to set a long period from the end of the privilege period to the end of the normal period 2. It is possible to set the point increase rate low and set the period from the end of the privilege period to the end of the normal period 2 to be a long period, but there is a risk that the motivation to play in the normal period 2 will decrease. That is, in this case, it is not possible to give the player an attractive period of dramatically granting points. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the disadvantageous normal period 1 is followed by the advantageous normal period 2.

87 and 88 are diagrams for explaining the normal period 2 in detail. The normal period 2 is a fixed period of 10 games, as shown in FIG. 87 (a).

FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the normal period 2 effect executed in the normal period 2. In the normal period 2 effect, the background image d320 indicating that the normal period 2 is set, the number of games d321 in the normal period 2, and the information d322 regarding the number of points are displayed on the effect image display device 157. The information d322 regarding the number of points is composed of the current number of points d322A and the target number of points d322B. In this embodiment, if 20 points are obtained at the end of the normal period 3, the probability of winning in the battle production is high (details will be described later), so the number of points d322B targeting these 20 points. It is displayed as. As a result, the player can face the game with a sense of expectation while comparing it with the target value.

There is a theoretical upper limit of points that can be obtained in the normal period 2, but if that value is displayed in the number of points d322B as a target, when the target is not reached or a value far from the target is obtained. , It may lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, a value smaller than the theoretical upper limit of the points and a value as a guideline for obtaining a result advantageous to the player is displayed. The guideline value for obtaining a favorable result for the player is a value at which the possibility of obtaining a favorable result is higher than when the value is smaller than the value. In addition, the standard value for obtaining a favorable result for the player is a value that is a rule that a new display is performed on the effect image display device 157 when the current number of points d322A is that value. It is good to be. For example, when the number of points d322B is 20 and the current number of points d322A is 20, the character color of the number of points d322B changes to another color. Alternatively, another character image such as a floral pattern is displayed around the display of 20 with the number of points d322B. The player can recognize that the new display has an advantage in appearance.

FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram showing a transition of the effect mode of the normal period 2 effect. As described above, since points are surely given to each game during the normal period 2, the number of points d322A increases as the game progresses. As described above, since the expected point value in one game in the normal period 2 is 1.3, it is possible to obtain 13 points on average in the normal period 2. In addition, at least 10 points can be obtained, that is, the normal period 2 is a period in which at least half of the target value can be obtained. If you can get about half the points, even if you do not know the point increase rate in the normal period 3, you can motivate yourself to perform the normal period 3 and check the result in the battle zone. ..

FIG. 88B is a time chart showing the update timing of the number of games d321 and the number of points d322A in one game. In the normal period 2, the number of games d321 is updated at the time t2 of the start lever operation, and the number of points d322A is updated at the time t5 of the third stop operation. In this way, since the update timings of the number of games d321 and the number of points d322A are different, the player can confirm the updated number of games d321 and the number of points d322A without overlooking.

89 and 90 are diagrams for explaining the normal period 3 in detail.

FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode of the normal period 3 effect in comparison with the effect mode of the normal period 2 effect. The time point t11 shown in FIG. 89A shows the end time point of the normal period 2, and FIG. 89B shows the effect mode in the effect image display device 157 at the time point t11. On the other hand, the time point t12 shown in FIG. 89B shows the time point of the normal period 3, and FIG. 89C shows the effect mode in the effect image display device 157 at the time point t12.

In the normal period 3 effect, the background image d330 indicating that the normal period 3 is set, the information d332 regarding the normal period 3 and the number of points are displayed on the effect image display device 157, but the display regarding the number of games in the normal period 3 is performed. Absent. That is, in the normal period 3, the information d332 regarding the number of points is continuously displayed from the normal period 2. The information d332 regarding the number of points is displayed to indicate to the player that it is better to play the game up to the battle zone. On the other hand, the number of games is not displayed because the normal period 3 is not a fixed period.

The normal period 3 may be set as a fixed period, but even in that case, the number of games may not be displayed. This is because it makes it easier to predict the number of points at the start of the battle zone from the number of points acquired at the end of the normal period 2 and the number of remaining games, which motivates the player to end the game. ..

FIG. 90A is a table schematically showing a lottery for the number of battle zone start games that determines the number of games until the start of the battle zone. In the present embodiment, when the normal period 3 is entered, the battle zone start game number lottery is executed and the number of games up to the battle zone is determined. For example, according to the lottery data shown in FIG. 90 (a), there is a 1/100 chance that the number of games up to the battle zone is 100 games, and a 1/100 chance that the number of games up to the battle zone is 200 games, ..., 80. The number of games up to the battle zone is determined with a probability of / 100, such as 800 games up to the battle zone. According to the lottery data shown in FIG. 90A, the number of games up to the battle zone is about 750 games on average.

FIG. 90 (b) shows whether to win the battle effect (shift to the expected state (CZ)) or lose the battle effect (shift to the normal period 3) based on the points acquired by the normal period 3. It is a figure which shows typically the lottery data of the CZ transition lottery to decide. In the CZ transition lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the number of points is 20 points or more, the winning percentage of the battle effect is improved. Specifically, when the points are 19 or less, the winning percentage of the battle production is 10%, but when the points are 20, the winning percentage of the battle production is 50%. In this way, when the number of points is 20 or more, the winning percentage of the battle effect is set to be high. Therefore, in the normal period 2 effect and the normal period 3 effect, this 20 is displayed as a target value.

In the present embodiment, the points acquired in the normal period are numerical values for determining whether or not the expected state (CZ) can be entered, but the method of utilizing the points acquired in the normal period is not limited to this. The points earned in the normal period are not particularly limited as long as they serve as an opportunity to give the player advantageous benefits and states. For example, in this embodiment, the winning percentage of the battle effect is increased when the number of points is large, but the number of benefits is increased when the number of points is large (when the AT state is entered via CZ, the number of AT games is large). May be given. In addition, if there are many points, the winning percentage of the battle effect will be high, and many benefits may be given.

FIG. 91 shows a specification (hereinafter referred to as specification 1) in which the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 are passed to shift to the normal period 3 after the end of the privilege period and the normal period 3 after the end of the privilege period, as in the present embodiment. It is the figure which compared the specifications (hereinafter, referred to as the specification 2) which shifts suddenly.

In the case of the specification 1, after the end of the privilege period, an average of 16 games (breakdown: 6 games in the normal period 1 and 10 games in the normal period 2) are consumed to shift to the normal period 3. In the average of 16 games, the players earn 13 points on average (see FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b)), so the average number of points earned per game in the 16 games is about 0.8 (=). 13/16).

On the other hand, in the case of the specification 2, since the average 16 games are all in the normal period 3, the average number of points earned by the player in the average 16 games is 1.6 points (see FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (c)). ), And the points earned per game in this average of 16 games is about 0.1.

As described above, the specification 1 of the present embodiment has a period setting that is more advantageous for the player than the specification 2 even when viewed numerically. That is, the specification 1 is a setting that makes it more difficult to end the game after the end of the privilege period than the specification 2.

FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the rationale for designing the total period of the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 as an average of 16 games. As a premise, in the normal state of this embodiment, the number of games required to digest all 50 medals is about 30 games, and when the privilege period (AT state) ends, 50 medals are credited. Explain as if it has been done.

When the privilege period (AT state) ends and the normal state is entered, the player considers ending the game. In this case, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the normal state, even if the loss continues in the winning combination internal lottery, 16 games (= 50/16) can continue the game in the normal state. That is, the player can play at least 16 games. Therefore, in order to have the decision to end the game not at the end of the privilege period (AT state) but at the time when 16 games are completed in the normal period, the total period of the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 is averaged 16 It was a game.

Then, when the normal period of 16 games is digested, the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 can be digested to obtain a large number of points (13 points on average), so that the player is more likely to continue the game thereafter. In other words, the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 can be digested using the 50 medals that were credited at the end of the privilege period (AT state) without inserting additional medals. It is difficult to give the impression of using medals in vain. That is, in the present embodiment, the motivation to continue the game can be increased even after the privilege period (AT state) ends.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 and an effect state of the first sub control unit 400 when the slot machine is turned off and the power is turned on.

FIG. 93A shows the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 when the setting is not changed, that is, when the power is turned on and the RAM is not cleared after the power is cut off. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 93A, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is the same as the normal state before the power failure and the normal state after the power is turned on. That is, if the normal state before the power failure is the normal period 1, the normal state after the power failure is also the normal period 1, and if the normal state before the power failure is the normal period 2, the normal state after the power failure is also the normal period. 2. If the normal state before the power failure is the normal period 3, the normal state after the power failure is also the normal period 3.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93A, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is usually three effect states after the power is turned on, regardless of the effect state before the power failure. .. That is, regardless of whether the effect state before the power interruption is the normal 1 effect state, the normal 2 effect state, or the normal 3 effect state, the effect state after the power is turned on is the normal 3 effect state.

FIG. 93B is a diagram showing an AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 and an effect state of the first sub control unit 400 when the setting is changed, that is, when the power is turned on and the RAM is cleared after the power is cut off. Is.

As shown in FIG. 93B, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is the same as the normal state before the power failure and the normal state after the power is turned on. That is, if the normal state before the power failure is the normal period 1, the normal state after the power failure is also the normal period 1, and if the normal state before the power failure is the normal period 2, the normal state after the power failure is also the normal period. 2. If the normal state before the power failure is the normal period 3, the normal state after the power failure is also the normal period 3.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93B, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is usually three effect states after the power is turned on, regardless of the effect state before the power failure. .. That is, regardless of whether the effect state before the power interruption is the normal 1 effect state, the normal 2 effect state, or the normal 3 effect state, the effect state after the power is turned on is the normal 3 effect state.

From the above, in the present embodiment, the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 after the power interruption when the setting is not changed, and the effect state after the power interruption when the setting is changed. Since the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 and the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 are exactly the same, even if the game is played immediately after the power is turned on, the player cannot grasp whether or not the setting has been changed. It has become. That is, the effect state immediately after the power is turned on is always set to the normal 3 effect state, and the normal period 3 effect is executed immediately after the power is turned on.

FIG. 93 (c) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the normal period 3 effect immediately after the power is turned on. In the normal period 3 effect of the present embodiment, the information d322 regarding the number of points is not displayed in the 30 games immediately after the power is turned on. The display is the same when the setting is changed and the RAM is cleared, and when the setting is not changed and the RAM is not cleared. This is because when the information d322 regarding the number of points is displayed in the normal period 3 effect immediately after the power is turned on, it becomes clear whether or not the setting is changed and the RAM is cleared based on the information d322 regarding the number of points. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the information d322 regarding the number of points is displayed only after the power is turned on, 30 games are digested in the normal period 3, and the predetermined points are accumulated.

As described above, 30 games is a period longer than the average period obtained by adding the normal period 1 and the normal period 2. That is, after digesting the games of the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 or more, the information d322 regarding the number of points is displayed in the normal period 3 effect.

The number of games that do not display the information d322 regarding the number of points in the normal period 3 effect is not limited to 30 games, and may be any number of games in the normal period 1 and the normal period 2 or more. For example, one of the number of games is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of games such as 30, 40, and 50, and the selected number of games is set as the number of games that does not display the information d322 regarding the number of points in the normal period 3 production. May be good. Further, the number of points may be displayed stepwise in the normal period 3 production. For example, when the number of points is 10, "5" is displayed in the 30th game and "5" (total) in the 40th game. 10) may be displayed.

<Game state control processing>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game state control process of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a process corresponding to the game state control process of step S512 of FIG. 55.

In step S801, the RT system game state and the AT system game state update process are executed. Further, in step S801, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command indicating the RT system game state and the AT system game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S802, a point acquisition process (detailed later) related to the point lottery is executed.

In step S803, processing related to AT such as AT lottery and AT addition lottery is executed.

In step S804, other game state control processes are executed. For example, when starting the normal period 3 from the next game, the battle zone start game number lottery is executed to determine the number of games up to the battle zone (see FIG. 90A). Further, when the normal period 3 ends and the game shifts to the battle zone from the next game, a CZ transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition to the CZ state can be performed (see FIG. 90B).

<Point acquisition process>
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the point acquisition process in step S802 of FIG. 94.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the AT system gaming state is in the normal state.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the normal period 1 is in the normal state. If the normal period is 1, the process proceeds to step S903, and the point lottery for the normal period 1 is executed. After the process of step S903, the point acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if the normal period is not 1, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the normal period 2 is in the normal state. If it is the normal period 2, the process proceeds to step S905, and the point lottery for the normal period 2 is executed. If the point lottery in the normal period 2 is won, the point value lottery is executed and the points given by the point value lottery are added to the current point value. After the process of step S904, the point acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the normal period 2, the process proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, it is determined whether or not the normal period 3 is in the normal state. If the normal period is 3, the process proceeds to step S907, and the point lottery for the normal period 3 is executed. If the point lottery in the normal period 3 is won, the point value lottery is executed and the points given by the point value lottery are added to the current point value. After the process of step S907, the point acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the normal period 3, the process proceeds to step S908.

In step S908, it is determined whether or not the normal period 4 is in the normal state. If the normal period is 4, the process proceeds to step S909, and the point lottery for the normal period 4 is executed. If the point lottery in the normal period 4 is won, the point value lottery is executed and the points given by the point value lottery are added to the current point value. After the process of step S909, the point acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if the normal period is not 4, the point acquisition process is terminated.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, the period of the normal period 3 is determined based on the result of the lottery for the number of games starting the battle zone, and the game is shifted to the battle zone. However, the battle zone may be shifted according to the points acquired by the normal period 3 (modification example 1).

FIG. 96 is a time chart of such a modification. In the example shown in FIG. 96, if 20 points are obtained by the normal period 3, the normal period 3 ends and the battle zone is entered. In addition, a modified example in which the eighth embodiment and the modified example 1 are combined may be used. That is, the initial number of games up to the battle zone may be determined in advance at the start of the normal period 3, and the predetermined number of games corresponding to the point values acquired by the normal period 3 may be subtracted from the initial number of games. For example, if 100 games are set as the initial number of games, if 20 points are acquired by the normal period 3, 80 games (= 100-20) until the transition to the battle zone will be acquired, and 30 points will be acquired by the normal period 3. , The number of games remaining up to the battle zone may be reduced, such as 70 games (= 100-30) until the transition to the battle zone. Make it easier to predict the number of games remaining up to the battle zone. Further, the predetermined number of games may be gradually subtracted from the initial number of games according to the point value acquired by the normal period 3. For example, when 100 games are set as the initial number of games, if 10 points are obtained by the normal period 3, the first lottery for deciding whether or not to perform each game and subtraction number lottery in the subsequent normal period 3 is performed. It is executed with a winning probability (winning probability 1/30), and when this lottery is won, the number of subtractions is determined (the number of games of 5 games, 10 games or 15 games is determined), and the determined number of games is determined. Is subtracted. Furthermore, if 20 points are obtained by the normal period 3, a lottery for deciding whether or not to perform each game and subtraction number lottery is executed with the second winning probability (winning probability 1/20) in the subsequent normal period 3. , When this lottery is won, the number of subtraction is determined (the number of games of 5 games, 10 games or 15 games is determined), and the determined number of games is subtracted. Further, if 30 points are obtained by the normal period 3, a lottery for deciding whether or not to perform each game and a subtraction number lottery is executed with a third winning probability (winning probability 1/15) in the subsequent normal period 3. If this lottery is won, a subtraction number lottery (determines the number of games of 5 games, 10 games, or 15 games) is performed, and the determined number of games is subtracted. The normal period 3 can be shortened according to the accumulated points.
In addition, the battle zone may be entered based on the points acquired by the normal period 3, and whether or not to win in the battle zone production may be determined based on the number of points at the end of the normal period 3. .. You can increase the fun of the game.

Further, although the normal period 1 of the eighth embodiment is a variable period, it may be a fixed period. FIG. 97A is a time chart showing that the normal period 1 is a fixed period. In the example shown in FIG. 97A, the normal period 1 is a fixed period of 6 games.

Further, although the normal period 2 of the eighth embodiment is a fixed period of 10 games, the fixed period does not have to be 10 games. For example, the fixed period may be the number of games selected by lottery from a plurality of options. FIG. 97B shows an example in which any one of 10, 15, or 20 games is set as a fixed period of the normal period 2. In this case, as the information d323 regarding the number of games, a fixed period (for example, 10) set together with the current number of games in the normal period 2 (for example, the first game) may be displayed. By visually recognizing the information d323 regarding the number of games, the player can grasp the number of remaining games in the normal period 2.

[Other game consoles]
In the above embodiment, a slot machine using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used as a game medium. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, ball game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc.

For example, the pachinko machine has a "launching device 1010 that launches a game ball into a predetermined game area 1002 and a start winning opening 1006 that is configured to allow the game ball launched from the launching device 1010 to enter" as shown in FIG. And, the detection means 1008 that detects the game ball that has entered the start winning opening 1006, and the payout means 1012 (or the consideration corresponding to the game ball) that pays out the game ball when the detection means 1008 detects the game ball. (Giving means) and a variable display device 1004 that variablely displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and the variable display device 1004 stops after the symbol is changed when the game ball is detected by the detection means 1008. It may be a pachinko machine 1000 that is displayed to notify the transition of the gaming state.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to the medals, and is a game medium. The input includes inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device), and the payout of the game medium involves inputting the digitized data to the predetermined external device (electronic storage device). It includes outputting.

[Summary of Embodiment]
(1) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Profit-giving means (for example, main control unit 300, medal-giving process S511, game state control S512, etc.) that grants a predetermined profit based on an operation on the operating means.
Notification means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation for notifying operation information (for example, information on the content of a stop operation) for the operation means. Navi etc.) and
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state), an AT period (for example, an AT state), and a chance period (for example, an expected state).
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period (for example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally elected in the AT state).
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the chance period to the AT period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the chance period (for example, when the AT transition lottery is won).
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the AT period to the chance period when the second transition condition is satisfied in the AT period (for example, when the number of AT games is exhausted).
The AT period includes a first AT period (for example, an AT state of 10 games) and a second AT period (for example, an AT state of 20 or 30 games).
In the first AT period, when the operation means is operated according to the operation information notified by the notification means, the total amount of the predetermined profits given by the profit-giving means is the first. It ’s a profitable period,
In the second AT period, when the operation means is operated according to the operation information notified by the notification means, the total amount of the predetermined profits given by the profit-giving means is the first. It is a period of more second benefit than the benefit of
The chance period includes a first chance period (for example, an expected state of 10 games) and a second chance period (for example, an expected state of 20 or 30 games).
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the first AT period, the game period setting means sets the first chance period and the second chance period immediately after the end of the first AT period. It is a means to set with a higher probability than the probability to set,
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the second AT period, the game period setting means sets the second chance period and the first chance period immediately after the end of the second AT period. It is a means to set with a higher probability than the probability to set,
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, a short chance period is likely to be set after a low profit AT state, and a long chance period is likely to be set after a high profit AT state, so that a long chance is set. It has the effect of not boring the player even during the period.

In the first basic configuration above
When the game period setting means shifts from the normal period or the chance period and sets the first AT period, the first AT period is set.
This is the first suitable configuration.

According to this first preferred configuration, it is possible to set an AT period in which the number of balls is unlikely to increase.

In the first basic configuration or the first preferred configuration,
The game period setting means is a means for setting the AT period after the predetermined period is completed without immediately ending the chance period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the first chance period. Yes,
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the second chance period, the game period setting means immediately ends the chance period and sets the AT period, or does not immediately end the chance period. It is a means for setting the AT period after the predetermined period is completed (for example, FIG. 39 (e)).
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to this second preferred configuration, the immediate AT period may be started in the second chance period, so that the interest can be improved even in the long chance period.

In the first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, or the second preferred configuration,
The AT period further includes a third AT period (eg, AT state of 50, 70 games).
In the third AT period, when the operation means is operated according to the operation information notified by the notification means, the total amount of the predetermined profits given by the profit-giving means is the second. It is a period of more third benefit than the benefit of
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the third AT period, the game period setting means sets the second chance period and the first chance period immediately after the end of the third AT period. It is a means to set with a higher probability than the probability to set,
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to this third preferred configuration, it is likely that a second chance period will be set after the third AT period, which is more profitable than the second AT period. You can expect it.

In the third preferred configuration,
The notification means internally wins the small winning combination 3 in the AT state when the same notification conditions are satisfied in any of the first AT period, the second AT period, and the third AT period. It is a means for notifying the operation information based on the case).
The AT period and the chance period are both periods defined by the number of games.
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to this fourth preferred configuration, the AT period and the chance period can be compared by a common index of the number of games, so that the game playability is easy to understand.

In the first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, or the fourth preferred configuration,
The second frequency has a zero probability of occurring,
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to this fifth preferred configuration
Even if the AT period and the chance period alternate, there will be no sudden increase in the number of balls. In other words, it is possible to frequently carry out consecutive villas with an appropriate AT period and a chance period.

(2) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image) for notifying notification means (for example, information regarding the content of stop operation) for notifying operation information for the operation means. Display device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state), an AT period (for example, an AT state), and a chance period (for example, an expected state).
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period (for example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally elected in the AT state).
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the chance period to the AT period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the chance period.
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the AT period to the chance period when the second transition condition is satisfied in the AT period.
When it is confirmed by the game period setting means that the AT period is set immediately after the end of the chance period, the effect executing means performs a definite suggestion effect (for example, a story effect of story 6) in the chance period. It ’s a viable means,
The game period setting means is expected when a condition for immediately suspending the chance period is satisfied in the chance period in which the effect executing means is executing the definite suggestion effect (for example, winning the AT transition lottery). If the state end lottery is won), the chance period can be immediately interrupted and the AT period can be set.
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, it is possible to expect the player to shorten the chance period while notifying the player that the AT period is fixed.

In the second basic configuration above
When the condition for immediate interruption is satisfied in the chance period in which the effect executing means is executing the definite suggestion effect, the game period setting means sets the AT period immediately after the chance period ends. It is a means capable of setting the chance period immediately after the end of the AT period and setting the AT period immediately after the end of the chance period (for example, FIG. 44A).
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to this sixth preferred configuration, the player can obtain two benefits of adding an AT period and shortening the chance period.

In the second basic configuration or the sixth preferred configuration,
The chance period includes a first chance period (for example, an expected state of 10 games) and a second chance period (for example, an expected state of 20 or 30 games).
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means that does not execute the definite suggestion effect during the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the definite suggestion effect during the second chance period.
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to this seventh preferred configuration, since the definite suggestion effect is executed in a long chance period, it is possible to improve the interest even if the disadvantageous period continues for a long time.

In the second basic configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or the seventh preferred configuration,
When the game period setting means immediately interrupts the chance period, the effect executing means executes the definite suggestion effect in the chance period immediately after the end of the AT period, which is started immediately after the end of the chance period. Is a means to
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to this eighth preferred configuration, since two AT periods are stocked, the chance period is not bored and the expectation for the AT period can be increased.

(3) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display device 157, operation for notifying operation information (for example, information on the content of a stop operation) for the operation means. Navi etc.) and
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
When the game period setting means is set a plurality of times, a plurality of the game period setting means are used for the AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the first AT period) excluding the last AT period included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the first group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the first value. It is a means to set as the first value to specify the AT period of
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
The game period setting means is a part of the value of the first group group (hereinafter, the second AT period) with respect to the last AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the second AT period) included in the privilege period. One of the values (referred to as a group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) is selected, and the selected value is set as the second value for specifying the second AT period. Means,
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, for the last AT period of the privilege period, a special AT period toward the end of the privilege period is set by narrowing the numerical options for specifying the AT period. be able to.

In the third basic configuration above
The game period setting means is a means for ending the privilege period based on a predetermined specific period end condition (for example, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached) which is the upper limit of the privilege period.
When setting the second AT period, the game period setting means is a means for setting the second value under the limitation of the predetermined specific period end condition.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to this ninth preferred configuration, since the last AT period is set within the range of the privilege period, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit to the player.

In the ninth preferred configuration,
The predetermined specific period end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games in the privilege period reaches the first number of games N1 (for example, the number of digested games is 1000).
When the game period setting means sets the second AT period when the remaining number of games up to the first game number N1 is R1 (for example, the remaining 100 games) in the privilege period, the second AT period is set. A value A1 (for example, 50) corrected from a predetermined value (for example, 70) selected from the group group is set as the second value.
The game period setting means sets the second AT period in R2 (for example, the remaining 50 games) in which the number of remaining games up to the first number of games N1 is smaller than that of R1 in the privilege period. , A means for setting a value A2 (for example, 20) corrected from the predetermined value (for example, 70) selected from the second group group as the second value.
R1-A1> R2-A2,
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to this tenth preferred configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the AT state while appropriately suppressing ball ejection.

In the third basic configuration, the ninth preferred configuration, or the tenth preferred configuration,
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Further equipped with an internal lottery process S505)
The plurality of types of set values include a high set value (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The value of the first group group includes a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high setting value, and the high value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the set value and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value. (For example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
The game period setting means sets the normal value to the second value.
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

Since the second value can be corrected for the final AT period, if the second value is set as the suggested number, the player will be confused. Therefore, in this eleventh preferable configuration, the second value is set as a normal value so as not to confuse the player.

In the third basic configuration, the ninth preferred configuration, the tenth preferred configuration, or the eleventh preferred configuration.
The game period setting means is a means for setting an ending AT period (for example, an AT state (ending)) having a predetermined fixed period (for example, 10 games) immediately after the end of the second AT period. ,
The privilege period is a period including the ending AT period.
This is the twelfth suitable configuration.

According to this twelfth preferred configuration, since the privilege period can be ended in the AT period of the fixed period, it is possible to proceed with the game with peace of mind and prepare for the normal period.

(4) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying operation information to the operation means For example, notification means for notifying the content of a stop operation (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, effect image display. Device 157, operation navigation, etc.)
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process S512) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Internal lottery process S505) and
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
When the game period setting means is set a plurality of times, a plurality of the game period setting means are used for the AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the first AT period) excluding the last AT period included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the first group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the first value. It is a means to set as the first value to specify the AT period of
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
When the game period setting means sets the AT period a plurality of times, the first group group with respect to the last AT period (hereinafter, referred to as a second AT period) included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as a second group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the second AT. It is a means to set as a second value to specify the period,
The plurality of types of set values include a high set value (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The value of the first group group includes a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high setting value, and the high value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the set value and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value. (For example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
The game period setting means sets the normal value to the second value.
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration, since the normal value is set instead of the setting suggestion value for the final AT period, the player can improve the expectation for the subsequent execution of the effect.

In the fourth basic configuration above
The game period setting means is a means for setting an ending AT period (for example, an AT state (ending)) having a predetermined fixed period (for example, 10 games) immediately after the end of the second AT period. ,
The privilege period is a period including the ending AT period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing a set value suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests the selected set value.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the set value suggestion effect during the ending AT period.
This is the thirteenth suitable configuration.

According to this thirteenth preferred configuration, since the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the ending AT period of the fixed period, the content of the set value suggestion effect can be surely recognized.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The game period setting means is a means for ending the privilege period based on a predetermined specific period end condition (for example, when the limiter of the privilege period is reached).
When the game period setting means sets the second value with respect to the second AT period, the second value is added in consideration of the predetermined specific period end condition and the fixed period of the ending AT period. Select a value from the group of
This is the 14th preferred configuration.

According to this 14th preferred configuration, since the last AT period and the ending AT period are set within the range of the privilege period, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive profit.

Further, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like),
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
A notification means (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, an operation navigation, etc.) for notifying operation information for the operation means.
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process S512) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Internal lottery process S505) and
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
When the game period setting means is set a plurality of times, a plurality of the game period setting means are used for the AT period (hereinafter, referred to as the first AT period) excluding the last AT period included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the first group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70) is selected, and the selected value is used as the first value. It is a means to set as the first value to specify the AT period of
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
When the game period setting means sets the AT period a plurality of times, the plurality of types of values are set with respect to the last AT period (hereinafter, referred to as a second AT period) included in the privilege period. One of the values (hereinafter referred to as the second group group) (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33) is selected, and the selected value specifies the second AT period. It is a means to set as the second value to be
The plurality of types of set values include a high set value (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The value of the first group group includes a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high setting value, and the high value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the set value and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value. (For example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
When the value selected from the second group group is the setting suggestion value, the game period setting means again sets the normal value closest to the setting suggestion value and smaller than the setting suggestion value. Select from the group of, and set the selected value to the second value.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing a set value suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting the selected set value after the second AT period is started.
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to this fifth basic configuration, a normal value is set instead of a set suggestion value for the last AT period, so that the player has a feeling of expectation for executing the set value suggestion effect in the last AT period. Can be improved.

(5) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
A notification means (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, an operation navigation, etc.) for notifying operation information for the operation means.
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process S512) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination) that executes a lottery process related to a game using lottery data associated with a set value selected from a plurality of types of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Internal lottery process S505) and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and an AT period (for example, an AT state).
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
The game period setting means selects one of a plurality of types of values (for example, 10, 20, 30, 33, 50, 55, 70), and uses the selected value as the AT period. It is a means to set as a specific value to specify,
The plurality of types of values are values that mean the length of the AT period, respectively.
The plurality of types of set values include a high set value (for example, settings 4 to 6) in which a result advantageous to the player is likely to be derived by the lottery process, and a result advantageous to the player by the lottery process. Includes low setting values that are unlikely to be derived (eg, settings 1-3).
The plurality of types of values include a setting suggestion value (for example, 33, 55) selected in a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the high setting value, and the high setting value. A normal value selected in both a game in which the lottery process is performed using the associated lottery data and a game in which the lottery process is performed using the lottery data associated with the low set value (for example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 70) and
The game period setting means sets either the setting suggested value or the normal value as the specific value.
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to this sixth basic configuration, the set value can be estimated while enjoying the AT period.

In the sixth basic configuration above
Further provided with specific value notification means (for example, AT game number notification effect, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, etc.) for notifying the set specific value.
When the specific value notification means notifies the specific value (for example, 20) a plurality of times, the specific value notification means notifies a value smaller than the specific value (for example, 10) in the first notification, and after the first time. It is a means for notifying the specific value (for example, 20) in the notification of.
When the normal value (for example, 20) is set as the specific value, the specific value notification means notifies the normal value (for example, 10) which is a value smaller than the specific value in the first notification. However, it is a means for notifying the normal value (for example, 20), which is the specific value, in the next and subsequent notifications (for example, FIGS. 45, 47, etc.).
The specific value notification means is a means that does not notify the setting suggestion value in either the first notification or the subsequent notification.
This is the fifteenth suitable configuration.

According to this fifteenth preferred configuration, when a normal value is set as a specific value, the set value is not inferred.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration,
When the setting suggestion value is set as the specific value (for example, 55), the specific value notification means notifies the normal value (for example, 20) in the first notification, and in the next and subsequent notifications. Notifying the setting suggestion value (for example, 55) (for example, FIG. 48),
This is the 16th preferred configuration.

According to this 16th preferable configuration, when the setting suggestion value is set as a specific value, the set value can be estimated by the later notification, so that the player's judgment is not confused.

In the 16th preferred configuration,
The notice effect executing means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc. Further equipped with an effect image display device 157)
The advance notice effect executing means is a means capable of executing the advance notice effect after the specific value notification means has notified the normal value (for example, FIG. 48B).
The notice effect executing means is a means that does not execute the notice effect after the specific value notification means notifies the setting suggestion value (for example, FIG. 48B).
This is the 17th preferred configuration.

According to this 17th preferred configuration, the advance notice effect can be effectively used without wasting it.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration,
The setting suggestion value includes a first setting suggestion value (for example, 33) and a second setting suggestion value (for example, 55).
The second setting suggestion value is a value including information more advantageous to the player than the first setting suggestion value.
When the second setting suggestion value is set as the specific value, the specific value notification means notifies the first setting suggestion value in the first notification, and the second setting suggestion value in the next and subsequent notifications. It is a means that can notify the setting suggestion value of,
This is the 18th preferred configuration.

According to this eighteenth preferred configuration, even when the setting suggestion value is notified for the first time, it is possible to improve the interest for the next and subsequent notifications, and the enjoyment of guessing the set value continues. Will be done.

(6) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Profit-giving means (for example, main control unit 300, medal granting process S511, game state control S512, etc.) that grants a predetermined profit (for example, the number of medals to be paid out) based on the operation on the operating means.
A notification means (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, an operation navigation, etc.) for notifying operation information for the operation means.
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
An effect image display means for displaying an effect image (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, an effect image display device 157), and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and an AT period (for example, an AT state).
The notification means is a means for notifying the operation information during the AT period.
The game period setting means is a means for ending the AT period when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the AT period (for example, MY2000 sheets).
The predetermined end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the operation mode for the operation means is the first operation mode (for example, a correct stop operation when the push order combination is internally won), and the operation means. It is a condition that is not satisfied when the operation mode for is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, an operation to stop an incorrect answer when an internal winning combination is won).
The game period setting means ends the AT period when the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode and the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final scheduled game of the AT period. When the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode and the predetermined end condition is not satisfied, the AT period is not terminated and is continued.
The effect image display means is a means for displaying a final game effect image (for example, a final game preview image d150) indicating that the final game in the AT period is the final game in the AT period.
The effect image display means follows the notification of the operation information by the notification means in the final scheduled game during the AT period, so that the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, an AT period end effect image (for example, AT end image d160) indicating that the AT period has ended is displayed, while the notification means is displayed in the final scheduled game of the AT period. When the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode and the predetermined end condition is not satisfied by not following the notification of the operation information by the means, the AT period end image is not displayed. is there,
This is the seventh basic configuration.

According to this seventh basic configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation in the final game scheduled for the AT period, and if a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final game scheduled for the AT period, it is profitable. The AT period can be ended with a sense of satisfaction.

In the seventh basic configuration above
The effect image display means is the final game after starting the display of the final game effect image in the final scheduled game during the AT period and before the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode. It is a means to end the display of the production image,
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to this nineteenth preferred configuration, the display of the final game image does not confuse the player regardless of the result of the game.

In the nineteenth preferred configuration above
The effect image display means displays the final game effect image after starting the display of the final game effect image in the final scheduled game during the AT period and before the operation on the operation means becomes possible. A way to end,
This is the 20th preferred configuration.

According to this twentieth preferred configuration, since the display of the final game image is terminated before the operation, there is an operation error, and even if the next game exists, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the nineteenth preferred configuration above
The effect image display means displays the final game image when the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode and the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final scheduled game during the AT period. Is a way to end
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to this 21st preferred configuration, since the display of the final game image is terminated based on the content of the operation, it becomes easy to recognize the end or continuation of the AT period.

In the seventh basic configuration, the nineteenth preferred configuration, the twentieth preferred configuration, or the twenty-first preferred configuration.
When the operation mode for the operation means becomes the first operation mode and the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the final scheduled game during the AT period, the effect image display means displays the final game effect image. In addition, or instead of the final game effect image, the AT period end effect image is displayed at the first timing, while in the final scheduled game of the AT period, the operation mode for the operation means is the second. It is a means for continuously displaying the final game effect image until at least the first timing (for example, the third stop operation) when the predetermined end condition is not satisfied in the operation mode.
The effect image display means is at least the first when the operation mode for the operation means becomes the second operation mode and the predetermined end condition is not satisfied in the final scheduled game during the AT period. This is a means for starting the display of the final game effect image in the next game of the final scheduled game during the AT period after erasing the display of the final game effect image continuously displayed until the timing of.
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to this 22nd preferred configuration, the situation can be accurately communicated to the player even in the case of an operation error.

(7) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
A notification means (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, an operation navigation, etc.) for notifying operation information for the operation means.
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
A first counting means for counting the passage of the privilege period (for example, a privilege period counter, a main control unit 300),
A second counting means (for example, an ending counter, a main control unit 300) for counting the passage of the last AT period included in the privilege period, and
With
When the first counting means counts up to the number of starts (for example, the first threshold value 990 of the count c1) at which the last AT period starts in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means counts the last AT. It is a means to set the period,
When the first counting means counts up to the first number of ends (for example, the second threshold value 1000 of the count c1) that ends the privilege period in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means is the last. It is a means to end the AT period and the privilege period.
When the second counting means counts the number of second ends (for example, the threshold value 10 of the count c2) that ends the last AT period in the lapse of the last AT period, the game period setting means It is a means to end the last AT period and the privilege period.
The first number of ends is equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding the number of second ends to the number of starts.
This is the eighth basic configuration.

According to this eighth basic configuration, the last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.

In the eighth basic configuration above
Further provided with progress display means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157) for displaying the elapse of a period (for example, game number image d140).
The progress display means is a means for displaying the progress counted by the second counting means during the last AT period, but not displaying the progress counted by the first counting means (for example, FIG. 61). ,
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to this 23rd preferred configuration, the player can be surely aware that the last AT period is over. Also, do not overly incite the end of the privilege period.

In the eighth basic configuration or the 23rd preferred configuration,
Further provided with an AT period granting means (main control unit 300, AT transition lottery, etc.) for granting the AT period based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition.
The game period setting means sets the AT period when the AT right granting means grants the AT period and a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of stocks is 1 or more and the specified number of games in the expected state is consumed). It ’s a way to get started,
The last AT period is a fixed period (eg, 10 games).
The AT right granting means is a means that does not satisfy the predetermined granting condition during the last AT period.
This is the 24th preferred configuration.

According to this 24th preferred configuration, since the last AT period is a fixed period even if there is no opportunity to grant the AT period, the privilege period can be surely completed.

In the eighth basic configuration, the 23rd preferred configuration, or the 24th preferred configuration,
Independent of the first counting means, a third counting means (for example, the privilege period counter 2) for counting the passage of the privilege period is further provided.
The game period setting means is a means for ending the last AT period and the privilege period when the third counting means counts up to the first end number in the lapse of the privilege period.
This is the 25th preferred configuration.

According to this 25th preferred configuration, if a problem occurs in the first counting means, a problem may occur in the counting of the second counting means, but due to the existence of the third counting means, there is a possibility that the counting means also fails. The last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.

(8) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the fifth to sixth embodiments and the like).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
A notification means (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, an effect image display device 157, an operation navigation, etc.) for notifying operation information for the operation means.
A game period setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) that sets a game period of any one of a plurality of types of game periods (for example, AT-type game states) determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Game state control process S512),
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period).
The game period setting means is a means capable of setting a plurality of AT periods (for example, AT state) in the privilege period.
The AT period is a period during which the notification means can notify the operation information.
The privilege period is a series of periods including the AT period a plurality of times.
A first counting means for counting the passage of the privilege period (for example, a privilege period counter, a main control unit 300),
A second counting means (for example, an ending counter, a main control unit 300) for counting the passage of the last AT period included in the privilege period, and
With
When the first counting means counts up to the number of starts (for example, the first threshold value 950 of the count c1) at which the last AT period starts in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means counts the last AT. It is a means to set the period,
When the first counting means counts up to the first number of ends (for example, the second threshold value 1000 of the count c1) that ends the privilege period in the lapse of the privilege period, the game period setting means is the last. It is a means to end the AT period and the privilege period.
When the second counting means counts the second number of endings (for example, the threshold value 10 of the count c2) that ends the last AT period in the lapse of the last AT period, the game period setting means said. A means of ending the last AT period and the privilege period.
This is the ninth basic configuration.

According to this ninth basic configuration, the last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.

In the ninth basic configuration above
When a predetermined counting interruption condition is satisfied in the last AT period (for example, one or two bets), the second counting means interrupts counting the elapse of the last AT period, and the above-mentioned It is a means for resuming counting the elapse of the last AT period when a predetermined counting resumption condition is satisfied (for example, three bets) in a state where counting the elapse of the last AT period is interrupted.
The first counting means is a means for counting the elapse of the privilege period regardless of whether or not the predetermined counting interruption condition is satisfied in the last AT period.
The first number of ends is equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding the number of second ends to the number of starts.
This is the 26th preferred configuration.

According to this 26th preferred configuration, the last AT period and the privilege period can be reliably terminated even if the last AT period is varied.

In the 26th preferred configuration,
An AT period granting means (main control unit 300, AT transition lottery, etc.) for granting the AT period based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition is further provided.
The game period setting means sets the AT period when the AT period granting means grants the AT period and a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of stocks is 1 or more and the specified number of games in the expected state is consumed). It ’s a way to get started,
The last AT period is a fixed period (eg, 10 games).
The AT period granting means is a means that does not satisfy the predetermined granting condition in the last AT period.
This is the 27th preferred configuration.

According to this 27th preferred configuration, since the last AT period is a fixed period even if there is no opportunity to grant the AT period, the privilege period can be surely completed.

In the ninth basic configuration, the 26th preferred configuration, or the 27th preferred configuration,
A third counting means (for example, a privilege period counter 2) that counts the passage of the privilege period independently of the first counting means is further provided.
The game period setting means is a means for ending the last AT period and the privilege period when the third counting means counts up to the first end number in the lapse of the privilege period.
This is the 28th preferred configuration.

According to this 28th preferred configuration, if a defect occurs in the first counting means, the counting of the second counting means may also be defective, but due to the existence of the third counting means, The last AT period and privilege period can be surely ended.

(9) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the seventh embodiment).
Operation means operated by the player (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) and
Notification means for notifying information about the game (for example, effect image display device 157, speaker 272, 277, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.)
An AT game control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls an AT game (for example, an AT game) for notifying operation information for the operation means, and
A specific period setting means (for example, main control unit 300) that sets a specific period (for example, a privilege period) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A counting means for counting the passage of the specific period (for example, a privilege period counter, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The AT game control means is a means capable of setting an AT game in the specific period.
The AT game control means is a means for adding the AT game when the AT addition condition is satisfied in the AT game.
The period of the AT game is
The AT normal period, where the addition is the first expected value, and
The AT special period (for example, the additional special zone), which is the second expected value whose addition is higher than the first expected value, and
With
When the counting means counts the first start number (for example, 991) while the AT normal period is set, the notification means executes a specific AT state notification (for example, an ending effect). It is a means for continuing the specific AT state notification that has started and started execution until the AT game ends.
When the counting means counts a second start number (for example, 970) smaller than the first start number when the AT normal period is set, the notification means sets the AT normal period. When the AT special period ends, the specific AT state notification is started to be executed, and the specific AT state notification that has started execution is continued until the AT game ends (for example, FIG. Perform premium ending production from Gn to 1000 games during the privilege period at 75),
This is the tenth basic configuration.

According to this tenth basic configuration, when the AT special period is set, it is possible to provide the player with a specific AT state notification ahead of schedule, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the tenth basic configuration above
The AT game control means is a means for ending the AT game and the specific period when the counting means counts a number of endings (for example, 1000) larger than the first starting number.
The specific AT state notification is an ending notification for notifying that it is an ending.
The notification means executes the ending notification for a period until the counting means counts the number of ends.
This is the 29th preferred configuration.

According to this 29th preferred configuration, the end of the AT game can be excited by the production and the end of the AT game can be clarified.

In the tenth basic configuration or the 29th preferred configuration,
When the AT game control means satisfies the end condition of the AT game after the AT game control means sets the AT special period and before the counting means counts the first start number. Ends the AT game and the specific period (for example, FIG. 77 (b)).
This is the thirtieth suitable configuration.

According to this thirtieth preferred configuration, even if the AT special period is set and the specific AT state notification is executed, the AT game does not always continue to the AT specific state, so that the remaining games are more stimulating. It can be a game with a sense of urgency.

In the tenth basic configuration, the 29th preferred configuration, or the thirtieth preferred configuration,
When the AT special period is set, the AT game control means executes the AT game of a predetermined fixed number of games (for example, 5 games) and ends the AT special period.
This is the 31st preferred configuration.

According to this thirty-first preferred configuration, the AT game is surely continued during the AT special period, so that it can be expected that the number of additional games will be given with confidence during the AT special period.

In the tenth basic configuration, the 29th preferred configuration, the thirtieth preferred configuration, or the thirty-first preferred configuration,
In the tenth basic configuration, the 29th preferred configuration, the thirtieth preferred configuration, or the thirty-first preferred configuration,
When the counting means counts the first start number and executes the specific AT state notification, the notification means executes the first specific AT state notification (for example, a normal ending effect). Is a means to do
In the notification means, the counting means counts the second start number in the lapse of the privilege period, the AT special period is set, and the effect mode is different from that of the first specific AT state notification. Execute the second specific AT status report (for example, premium ending effect),
This is the 32nd preferred configuration.

According to this 32nd preferred configuration, various specific AT state notifications can be provided in the state of the AT game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

(10) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the eighth embodiment).
Point accumulating means for accumulating points (for example, main control unit 300, point acquisition process),
Advantageous setting means (for example, main control unit 300, CZ transition lottery, etc.) that sets an advantage to the player based on the points accumulated by the point accumulation means.
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process) for setting any one of a plurality of types of game periods, and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period) that is more advantageous than the normal period.
The normal period includes a first normal period (for example, normal period 1), a second normal period (for example, normal period 2), and a third normal period (for example, normal period 3).
The game period setting means is a means for setting the first normal period when the privilege period ends.
The game period setting means is a means for setting the second normal period when the first normal period ends.
The game period setting means is a means for setting the third normal period when the second normal period ends.
The game period setting means is a means that makes it easier to set the privilege period when the advantageous setting is performed by the advantageous setting means in the normal period than when the advantageous setting is not performed by the advantageous setting means. Yes,
The point accumulating means is a means for not accumulating the points in the first normal period (for example, FIG. 84).
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating points based on the establishment of predetermined conditions in the second normal period and the third normal period (for example, FIG. 84).
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating the first number of points per unit period (for example, 1.3 per game) in the second period.
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating a second number of points (for example, 0.1 per game) smaller than the number of the first points per unit period in the third period (for example, FIG. 84 etc.),
This is the eleventh basic configuration.

According to this eleventh basic configuration, when the privilege period ends and the normal period begins, it is more than the disadvantageous first normal period, the advantageous period second normal period, and the second normal period. Since the normal period is advanced in the flow of the third normal period, which is less advantageous, the player can continue the game even after the privilege period ends.

Further, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the eighth embodiment),
Point accumulating means for accumulating points (for example, main control unit 300, point acquisition process),
Advantageous setting means (for example, main control unit 300, CZ transition lottery, etc.) that sets an advantage to the player based on the points accumulated by the point accumulation means.
A game period setting means (for example, main control unit 300, game state control process) for setting any one of a plurality of types of game periods, and
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of gaming periods include a normal period (for example, a normal state) and a privilege period (for example, a privilege period) that is more advantageous than the normal period.
The normal period includes a first normal period (for example, normal period 1), a second normal period (for example, normal period 2), and a third normal period (for example, normal period 3).
The game period setting means is a means for setting the first normal period when the privilege period ends.
The game period setting means is a means for setting the second normal period when the first normal period ends.
The game period setting means is a means for setting the third normal period when the second normal period ends.
The game period setting means is a means that makes it easier to set the privilege period when the advantageous setting is performed by the advantageous setting means in the normal period than when the advantageous setting is not performed by the advantageous setting means. Yes,
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating the points in the first normal period, the second normal period, and the third normal period (for example, FIG. 84).
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating the first number of points per unit period (for example, 1.3 per game) in the second normal period.
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating the first number of points per unit period in the first normal period.
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating a second number of points per unit period in the second normal period.
The point accumulating means is a means for accumulating a third number of points per unit period in the third normal period.
The number of the first points is less than the number of the second points and the number of the third points.
The number of the second points is larger than the number of the third points (for example, FIG. 84).
This is the twelfth basic configuration.

According to this twelfth basic configuration, when the privilege period ends and the normal period starts, it is more than the disadvantageous first normal period, the advantageous period second normal period, and the second normal period. Since the normal period is advanced in the flow of the third normal period, which is less advantageous, the player can continue the game even after the privilege period ends.

In the eleventh basic configuration and the twelfth basic configuration described above,
A display means for displaying (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, an effect image display device 157) is provided.
The display means is a means for displaying the remaining period related to the remaining period in the second normal period (for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The display means is a means that does not display the remaining period in the first normal period (for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
This is the 33rd preferred configuration.

According to this 33rd preferred configuration, the second normal period in which points are easily obtained is followed by the third normal period, so that it is easy to face the longest third normal period.

In the eleventh basic configuration, the twelfth basic configuration, and the 33rd preferred configuration,
The display means is a means for displaying the accumulated points, which is the display of the points accumulated by the point accumulating means, and the target point display, which is the display of the target points, in the second normal period (for example,). , Fig. 87 (b), etc.),
This is the 34th preferred configuration.

According to this thirty-fourth preferred configuration, it is possible to promote the player's willingness to continue playing the game during the second normal period.

In the eleventh basic configuration, the twelfth basic configuration, the 33rd preferred configuration, and the 34th preferred configuration,
The advantageous setting means is a means for performing the advantageous setting with a first probability (for example, 10%) when the points accumulated by the point accumulating means are less than the target points.
When the points accumulated by the point accumulating means are equal to or more than the target points, the advantageous setting means sets the advantageous setting with a second probability (for example, 50% or more) higher than the first probability. Is,
This is the 35th preferred configuration.

According to this thirty-fifth preferred configuration, it is possible to promote the player's willingness to continue playing after the second normal period.

In the eleventh basic configuration, the twelfth basic configuration, the 33rd preferred configuration, the 34th preferred configuration, and the 35th preferred configuration,
The point accumulating means is a means capable of accumulating the points by averaging more than half of the target points in the second normal period.
This is the 36th preferred configuration.

According to this thirty-sixth preferred configuration, the third normal period can be approached with a sense of expectation.

In the eleventh basic configuration, the twelfth basic configuration, the 33rd preferred configuration, the 34th preferred configuration, the 35th preferred configuration, and the 36th preferred configuration,
A display means for displaying (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, an effect image display device 157) is provided.
The display means has the third type, regardless of whether the normal period before the power failure is any period, in the case where the reset process is performed after the power failure and power recovery and the case where the reset process is not performed after the power failure and power recovery. It is a means for displaying an effect indicating a normal period (for example, FIG. 93).
This is the 37th preferred configuration.

According to the 37th preferable configuration, since the effect image showing the third period is displayed regardless of the presence / absence of the setting change, the player cannot grasp the presence / absence of the setting change.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and is various with respect to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Can be modified or modified, and those accompanied by such modification or modification are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Design display window 127 Number of payout indicators 130, 131, 132 Medal insertion button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 190 Navigation occurrence status notification lamp 272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub control unit 500 2nd sub control unit

In order to achieve the above object, the game console according to the present invention is, as one aspect,
The operation means operated by the player and
A notification means for notifying operation information for the operation means and
A game period setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
An effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect,
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period, an AT period, and a chance period.
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period.
The game period setting means is a means capable of shifting to the AT period immediately after the end of the chance period.
When it is confirmed by the game period setting means that the AT period is set immediately after the end of the chance period (hereinafter, "first case"), the effect executing means produces a definite suggestion effect in the chance period. It ’s a viable means,
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing a non-deterministic suggestion effect in the chance period when it is not determined by the game period setting means to set the AT period immediately after the end of the chance period.
In the first case, the effect executing means is a means capable of executing an undetermined suggestion effect during the chance period.
There are multiple types of chance periods,
The plurality of types of chance periods include a first chance period and a second chance period.
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means that does not execute the definite suggestion effect during the first chance period.
The presentation execution section, means Ru der executable said definite suggestion effect in the second chance period,
It is characterized by that.

Claims (3)

The operation means operated by the player and
A notification means for notifying operation information for the operation means and
A game period setting means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game periods determined in advance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
An effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect,
It is a game table equipped with
The plurality of types of game periods include a normal period, an AT period, and a chance period.
The chance period is a period in which it is easier to shift to the AT period than the normal period.
The notification means is a means capable of notifying the operation information during the AT period.
The game period setting means is a means for shifting the game period from the chance period to the AT period when the first transition condition is satisfied in the chance period.
When it is confirmed by the game period setting means that the AT period is set immediately after the end of the chance period (hereinafter, "first case"), the effect executing means produces a definite suggestion effect in the chance period. It ’s a viable means,
There are multiple types of chance periods,
The plurality of types of chance periods include a first chance period and a second chance period.
The second chance period is longer than the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means that does not execute the definite suggestion effect during the first chance period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the definite suggestion effect during the second chance period.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing the first chance period effect to recognize that it is the first chance period in the first chance period.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The effect executing means is a means capable of executing a non-deterministic suggestion effect in the chance period when it is not determined by the game period setting means to set the AT period immediately after the end of the chance period.
In the first case, the effect executing means is a means capable of executing an indeterminate suggestion effect during the chance period.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
When the condition for immediately suspending the chance period is satisfied in the chance period in which the effect executing means is executing the definite suggestion effect, the game period setting means immediately suspends the chance period and the AT period. Is a configurable means,
A game table characterized by that.